Objects

Reference Manual Objects
Introduction
Introduction
Content
Introduction 1
General ...................................................................................................................2 Documentation structure.........................................................................................3
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 01.03.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\01_Introduction_e.doc
1-1
Introduction
General
You have here the Objects1 Manual for CEMAT V6. This manual is part of the Reference Manual. It should support you in performing the work required to configure your plant. The Objects1 Manual is part of a comprehensive CEMAT V6 complete documentation. In the current version V6, this consists of the volumes listed below.
Engineering Manual
Reference Manuals System Objects Glossary
After the installation of CEMAT V6 the CEMAT documentation is available as PDL in directory D:\Cem_V6\Docu On the following pages you will find the content of each manual.
1-2
Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Introduction
Documentation structure
The manuals contain the following chapters:
Engineering Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. 10 11 12 13 14 15 Introduction Preparations Installation of a PCS 7 Project Assignments Engineering Examples PLC Engineering PLC-PLC Coupling to older CEMAT Versions OS Engineering free free Project administration free Graphic Templates Tips&Tricks Update Information
Reference - System 1 2 3 4 5 6 System Description Introduction
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.
1-3
Introduction
Reference - Objects 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Interlock Interlock 5 Adapt to Simocode Introduction General Unidirectional Drive Damper Valve Annunciation Module UM-Module Route Module Group Module Selection Silopilot CNT-Module RT-Module PID Controller Step Controller Adapt Measured Value Integrator Bi-Directional Drive Annunation Module with 8 Alarms
Reference - Glossary 1 2 Introduction Definitions and Instructions
1-4
Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
General
2 General
2 GENERAL
CEMAT Modules Module data Explanations to the Table Module Data: Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration: Introduction to the Module Description (AS) Type/number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Error handling Start-up charactristics Time characteristics Annunciation characteristics Module states Commands I/O bar of ... OS variables table
1
2 3 5 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 11
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 26.02.2003 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc
2-1
General
CEMAT Modules
The library "ILS_CEM" contains all blocks which are required for a running CEMAT PLC. The Reference Manual Objects describes the functions of the CEMAT Object modules. All further Blocks you find in the general Documentation of PCS 7. In this chapter you find the general, information about the CEMAT modules which is not specific for a certain object. You will find information about performance, an introduction to the module description (AS), general display rules (OS) and the representation forms of the objects. In addition you will find operating instruction for the HMI.
2-2
General
Module data
FB/FC Module Comment from Numbe (Type Name) symbol list r Number of functions per AS 416-2 Runtime in (ms) CPU416-3 without fault 0,05 0,085 0,065 0,02 0,05 0,055 0,05 0,12 0,05 0,025 0,1 0,005 0,005 0,005 ** 0,025 0,01 0,015 ** ** ** 0,01 0,005 Runtime in Module Loading Temp. Instance-DB Instance-DB Multi(ms) length memory memory length loading instance CPU416-3 (bytes) (bytes) (bytes) (bytes) memory module with 20% (bytes) fault 0,07 0,15 4026 5010 38 178 882 0,105 0,185 6598 7934 80 262 1188 0,085 0,165 5172 6286 40 200 988 0,04 0,12 1428 1864 14 108 430 0,07 0,15 3112 3918 20 166 714 0,075 0,07 0,155 0,15 4344 3726 1948 2814 2062 512 916 510 214 150 1632 320 638 94 90 94 328 378 5418 4656 2650 3678 2614 834 1136 644 326 270 2122 520 812 0 0 0 2 4 46 38 24 28 26 12 42 18 8 0 18 2 2 ----------394 154 164 176 140 86 122 90 80 66 120 134 46 ----------1206 836 768 896 528 372 276 200 170 174 520 314 182 nein nein nein nein nein Number Number of of annunciatio HMI ns variables ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja ja nein Ja Ja Ja --------17 23 18 5 25 28 12 35 38 8 2 6 4 7 2 12 2 11 ---------
FB1001 FB1002 FB1003 FB1004 FB1005
Unidirectional drive Damper Bi-directional drive Annunciation module Annunciation module with 7 Alarms FB1006 C_MEASUR Measuring value FB1007 C_VALVE Valve FB1009 C_ROUTE Route module FB1010 C_GROUP Group module FB1011 C_SILOP Silo pilot FB1013 C_SELECT Selection module FB1015 C_COUNT Counter block FB1016 C_RUNNT Runtime supervisio FB1026 C_MEAS_I Integrierer FB1020 C_FB_PLC AS-Objekt FB1033 C_SIMO_A Adapter for SIMOCODE FB1075 C_INTER5 Interlock with 5 Inputs FB1075 C_INTERL Interlock with 10 Inputs FC528 OB1_SYS2 ILS OB1 End FC529 OB35_SYS1 ILS OB35 Begin FC530 OB35_SYS2 ILS OB35 End FC1017 C_MUX FC1018 C_ADAPT
C_DRV_1D C_DAMPER C_DRV_2D C_ANNUNC C_ANNUN8
0,45
0,125
0,045
0,125
1 1 1
44 40 44 248 292
Additional block for group/route
Adapter block to connect non-CEMAT modules into group FC1088 C_PUSHBT Control Desk Push Buttons and Lamps FC1102 OB1_SYS1 ILS OB1 Begin FC1103 C_OB1SY1 CEMAT OB1 Start
** ** **
308 72 72
382 122 122
10 6 6 FB50, FB1030
-------
-------
nein nein nein
-------
-------
CAUTION: The modules specified in the table require the following FB,FC and DB:DB678-DB682
FC509 to FC530 and FC1061, FC1062 ** not relevant
2-3
General
Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Number of functions per AS The system functions are called only once.
Runtime in ms The time that the CPU needs to process the associated module program in the normal situation (e.g. in the case of a driver, the processing time of the watch-dog timer organizational block (OB), without producing an annunciation for a channel error). The following table contains the runtimes in a S7 416-2 DP 6ES7416-2XK01-0AB0. The runtimes for other CPUs depend on their performance.
Module length Memory requirement of the program code, once per module type.
Instance DB length Memory requirements of an instance DB
Temporary memory The local data storage required in a processing level for an invocation of the module. This is limited for a specific CPU, and causes a CPU stop should it be exceeded. You must check this in the CPU configuration and, if necessary, redistribute to the processing levels (OBs) in accordance with the actual requirement.
Multi-instance module The technological module uses the specified modules and must be contained in the AP (application program). They are stored in the same library.
2-5
General
Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration:

Group Route 10 8 Select 30 Motor 150 Damper Annun. Meas. Valve Silopilot Counter value 20 200 200 50 2 10 Runtime 5 Controller Cycl. S7 15 54ms PBK 805 Compil. Load 3 min. 4,5 min Map. 7 min
Communication resources (PBK) for
CPU 416-2 max. 600 i.e. number of CEMAT modules, max. 550 CPU 416-3 max. 1800 i.e. limitation via the cycle time
2-6
General
Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

The module descriptions always have same form. This helps you to find the required information quickly when you read the description of the individual module. Here is a description of the sections:
Type/number
The listed blocks have to be called if you want to use the object. The Blocks are listed with name and number. Module name: Module no.: Unique name of the S7 Block, e. g. C_DRV_1D For the CEMAT Objects this corresponds to the name of the object type. Unique number of the function block (FB) or function (FC)
Calling OBs
This provides details of the organizational blocks (OBs) in which the described block must be installed. In contrast to the general PCS 7 libraries the CEMAT library has some specialties. Most of the CEMAT blocks must be called exclusively in the OB1 task. Exceptions to this are the counter and the pulse evaluation of the software speed monitor and and the silo pilot. These blocks can be called in a time interrupt OB. The detailed information you find in the object descriptions. Some blocks of the system chart have to be called in more than one task, e. g. the system part of the PLC-PLC coupling. If you copy the complete system chart from the delivered library into the S7 Program of your project, the blocks are automatically called in the right tasks. When you install the modules in the CFC they are automatically called after the most recently installed module. If necessary, you must change the processing sequence with the run-time editor. The CFC creates the necessary OBs during the compilation.
Function
This contains a summary of the function of the module. The section operating principle contains further information for complex modules.
Operating principle
This contains more detailed information on the function of individual inputs, operating modes, time processes, etc. You should understand the interrelationships described here in order to use the module effectively.
2-7
General
Error handling
The error display is located in the CFC plan at the ENO Boolean module exit. The value corresponds to the BIE (binary result in STEP 7-STL on completion of the module) or the OK bit (in SCL notation) and means: ENO=BIE=OK=1 (TRUE) -> the module result is correct. ENO=BIE=OK=0 (FALSE) -> the result or the general conditions for this calculation (e.g. entry values, operating mode, etc.) are invalid.
Start-up charactristics
A differentiation is made between: First run The module is called initially from the OB in which it has been inserted. This is usually the OB in which the normal, process-related processing takes place (e.g. OB1). The module is preset with the status corresponding to the input parameters. These can be default values (also refer to I/O bar) or previously configured values, which, for example, you have parameterized in the CFC. No special start-up behavior is described unless the module deviates from this rule. Start-up The module is processed once during a CPU start-up. To ensure this, the module has to be called from a start-up OB (where it is included automatically by the ES). The start-up behavior is described in this case. The CEMAT object modules dont have start-up characteristics. The blocks are called exclusivly in the cyclical program.
Time characteristics
A module with time characteristics must be installed in an cyclic interrupt OB. It calculates its time constants/parameters using its sampling time (the time interval between two successive, cyclical processing steps). The sampling is determined by the step downs for the so-called runtime group. This ensures that the module is not processed for every OB passage. This sampling time is entered in the I/O bar, in the SAMPLE_T parameter. The time behavior is mentioned only when the module exhibits such behavior. The CEMAT object modules dont have time characteristics. However for some of the objects the run sequence is important. This is described under time characteristics.
2-8
General
Annunciation characteristics
The module with this behavior reports various events to the higher-level OS. When present, the parameters needed to create the annunciation are documented. Modules without annunciation behavior can be augmented with additional annunciation modules. The description for modules with annunciation capability contain an indication of the annunciation behavior.
Module states
The status of the CEMAT Objects is shown in the symbol through change of the bitmap of change of the color and in the faceplate through a short info text. The presetation of the visualisation status is shown under module status.
Commands
The possible commands for the object are listed in the OS variables table.
I/O bar of ...

The I/O bar provides the data interface for the module. You can use this to pass data to the module and to fetch results from the module.
Element U1 Meaning Summand 1 Format REAL 0 Default I Type Attr. Q HMI + Permitted Values >0
The "I/O-bar" table shows all input and output parameters of the module type which the user can access with his configuring means. Those elements that can be reached only from the module algorithm are not listed (so-called internal variables). The columns have the following meaning: Element Name of the parameter, derived from the designation, e.g. PV_IN = Process Variable INput (process quantity, control quantity). Where appropriate, the same name convention as for SIMATIC is used. Meaning Function (possibly short description) Format S7 data type of the parameter (BOOL, REAL, etc.). Default The value of the parameter before the module runs for the first time (provided it has not been changed during the configuring).
2-9
General
Type Type of the module algorithm access to the parameter; a differentiation is made between inputs, non-isolated inputs and outputs (refer to table). Parameter Types:
Abbreviation I O IO Type Input. Value supplied to the module (display in the CFC: left-hand parameter list) Output. Output value (display in the CFC: right-hand parameter list) Input/Output. Non-isolated input, which can be written from the OS and rewritten from the module (display in the CFC: left-hand parameter list)
Attr. (Attribute) Additional characteristics of the parameter when used under CFC. Non-connected input and input-output parameters can be parameterized (only input-output parameters for online FCs). Output parameters cannot be parameterized and can be transferred in the CFC by connecting to an input of the same data type. Additional or deviating properties of the parameter are specified as follows: Attributes of the parameters:
Abbreviation B E M Q U Attribute Can be operated (only using the OS). An OS can make write access to the element. It is implicitly not visible in the CFC. Transferred to the OS when changed MESSAGE ID not parameterizable for annunciation module (e.g. ALARM 8P). ID specified from the annunciation server. Connectable. The element can be connected with another output of the same type. Not visible in the CFC. Because the element is supplied by the CFC or the OS, it is not displayed in the CFC (e.g. message ID). It is a default value that can be changed in the CFC.
HMI The parameters marked with "+" can be changed and monitored from the associated OS module. Permitted values Additional limitation within the data type value range.
2-10
General
OS variables table
In the OS variables table the detail information for all HMI variables is llisted for the object type. These variables are used to exchange information between AS and OS. The following information can be seen in the table S7 Parameter Name Parameter name used in the S7 program (internal information) Assignment Symbolic name of the parameter used in the CFG-File (internal information) OS Variable No. Variable number used in the CFG-File (internal information) Designation German Description text of the parameter in german Designation English Description text of the parameter in english Output level Where is the information shown in the OS S = in the Symbol O = in the Faceplate D = in the Diagnostic dialog Presentation Number/NK Number of Digits for representation on the OS Unit Unit of the value Type Parameter type I = Input O = Output I/O = In/Out Value range Value can be entered between this range Annunciation Class Message class, e. g. ALF = PLC Control System Annunciation Fault Class Classification according to the origin of the fault E = Electrical S = Safety M = Mechanical P = Process Event Text Text which is displayed in the alarm line Operator Authorization Assigned authorization code according to the user administrator (see list under Operator Authorization)
2-11
Unidirectional Drive
3 Unidirectional Drive
3 UNIDIRECTIONAL DRIVE
Description of C_DRV_1D Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Hardware outputs Interfaces to the OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module States Commands I/O-bar of C_DRV_1D OS-Variable table
1
2 2 2 3 4 4 5 10 11 12 13 15 15 16 18 18 19 19 20 23
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc
3-1
Description of C_DRV_1D
Type/Number
Main module: Module name: Module no.: C_DRV_1D FB1001
Calling OBs
C_DRV_1D must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
3-2
Function
With the unidirectional drive one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of drives. The module monitors as per standard feedback ERM in conjunction with contactor output EBE, electrical availability ESB, overload EBM, the position of the local switch in automatic operation EVO and a speed monitor signal. In the event of a fault the module switches off the drive. The drive block offers two alternatives for the supervision of a speed monitor signal: A steady 1Signal or Pulses (software speed monitor). The pulse evaluation is built in the drive block itself. For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this block with the CEMAT-adapter-block "C_SIMO_A", which communicates with the SIMOCODE basic-unit.
Alarm messages: In the event of a fault the drive generates an alarm message. Additional protection signals like e.g. pull-rope or belt drift switch of conveyor belts, bearing temperature etc. also switch off the drive but they cannot be analysed in detail by the drive module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal in order to display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization: All drive conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard for OS provides block icons for status display (running, off, faulty, operating mode) as well as faceplates for the display of more detailed information.
Operating modes: The drive module has 3 types of operating modes: Automatic mode (Start/Stop is done through the associated group) Single-start mode (Start/Stop for each drive separately is possible via the OS) Local mode via the PLC (Start/Stop with local switch) The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module generates a release signal for the respective operating mode. This signal must be connected to the appropriate operating mode release interface of the drive module.
Sequence Test In Sequence Test mode the motor can be started without hardware signals. The feedback of the contactor and eventually a speed monitor are simulated. The hardware inputs (ESB; EBM; EVO...) are still active and have to be simulated by a test program at the beginning of OB1 Cycle. If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the drive can be connected to input SIM_ON of the Driver blocks to enable the simulation.
3-3
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
ERM Feedback ON Basic state 0-signal The ERM parameter must be connected. It is appropriate to use the feedback contact of the main contactor for this purpose. The feedback is monitored in automatic mode and in the singlestart mode. The monitoring time for switching on/off the motor can be set with the parameter FEEDBTIM. An alarm is issued if no feedback occurs and/or the monitoring time expires.
ESB
Electrical availability
Basic state 1-signal
The ESB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the motor. The electrical availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EBM
Overload
Basic state 1-Signal
The EBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the motor (bimetal). The overload is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EVO
Local switch
The EVO parameter is used for the connection with the local switch of the motor. EVO = 1signal means automatic position and EVO = 0-signal means local position. No alarm signal occurs in the control room in local mode. In position Local (EVO = 0-signal) the motor can be started and stopped via ESR and ESP.
ESP
Local stop
The ESP parameter is used to stop the motor in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. the 0signal stops the motor. By default the local stop ESP is only active if the drive is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
ESR
Local start
The ESR parameter is used to start the motor in local mode. A 1-signal to ESR starts the motor. Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface = 1signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal). Caution: The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM contactor feedback message arrives. For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.
3-4
Input interfaces
EEVG Start interlock Basic state 1-Signal The drive can be started in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EEVG prevents the start. In local mode the starting interlock is not effective. Typical application: The fan can be started only with closed fan damper. For this, the interface EEVG must be connected with the signal KVS1 of the damper. The run signal of the fan must be connected to the inching release of the damper, i.e. as soon as the fan is operating, the damper can be opened or positioned. The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to damper direction 1 and to the fan drive. As soon as the damper has reached limit position 1 the start interlock of the fan drive has 1-signal and the fan drive is also switched on.
EBVG
Operating interlock
The drive can run in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EBVG prevents the start or switches off the running drive. In local mode the operating interlock is not effective. Typical application: Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running may the following drive be started. As soon as the upstream drive fails the following drive must stop as well. For this, interface EBVG must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both drives. As soon as the upstream drive is running the operating interlock of the following drive has 1-signal and this drive is also started.
ESVG
Protection interlock (always effective)
All signals which indicate a drive fault and which are not monitored by the drive module as per standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status healthy, 0-signal means faulty. Interface ESVG is effective for all operating modes of the drive. Caution: When the drive is switched off via ESVG the drive module does not generate an alarm message. For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protective interlock one must use the output MAU of the appropriate annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
Typical application: All suppressor circuits concerning operator and machine safety and so which must be effective all the time (e.g. pull-rope).
3-5
ESVA
Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Basic state 1-signal
All signals which indicate a drive fault and which are not monitored by the drive module as per standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status OK, 0-signal means faulty. Interface ESVA is effective only in automatic mode and single-start mode, i.e. in the case of a fault the drive can still be operated in local mode. Caution: When the drive is switched off via ESVA the drive module does not generate an alarm message. For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protective interlock one must use the output MAU of the appropriate annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
Typical application: Belt drift switch: If the belt drift switch responds this means in automatic mode a drive fault. However, it must be possible to start the drive in local mode to align the belt.
ESPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface ESPO stops the motor without resetting of the command memory EKS. The motor is still activated and restarts automatically with 1-Signal at this interface. To stop the motor completely 1-Signal at EBFA or 0-Signal at EBVG is required. If the motor is stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group. This interface does not work in local mode. Typical application: A pump which is started and stopped depending on a pressure signal.
EDRW
Hardware speed monitor
If a continuous 1-signal is available for speed monitor supervision the speed monitor signal must be connected to interface EDRW. At the same time the software speed monitor must be disabled (REL_SSM = 0-signal) A 1-signal at interface EDRW means that the motor is running and the Speed monitor has responded. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does not provide a continuous 1-signal within the default time, the drive module generates an alarm message. The speed monitor supervision is only effective in automatic mode and in single-start mode.
SW_SPEED
Pulse signal software speed monitor
If you get pulses from the speed monitor, the pulse input must be connected to interface SW_SPEED. The software speed monitor function must be enabled via REL_SSM = 1-Signal. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does not provide pulses within the default time (considering the tolerance value TOL_SSM), the drive module generates an alarm message. Input-signal for software speed monitor. The speed monitor supervision is only effective in automatic mode and in single-start mode. Make sure that the duration of the pulses is long enough. If the OB1 cycle time is 100ms, pulses and pause should be at least 200ms.
3-6
ELOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the drive for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the drive can be started/stopped via inputs ESR and ESP. The operating mode is changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting interface ELOC with signal GLO of the appropriate group. In local mode operation via the PLC only the protective interlock ESVG is effective. The connection of interfaces EEVG, EBVG and ESVA is not analysed in local mode. In local mode no logic signal EVS is generated!
EEIZ
Single-start mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the drive, i.e. the drive can be started and stopped separately from the central control room. The operating modes are changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface EEIZ with signal GES of the appropriate group. In single-start mode all interlocks of the drive are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
ESTB
Stand-by mode
In the philosophy of CEMAT-Standards only the active plant sections can generate alarm messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty this is indicated in the symbol at the flow mimic but there will be no alarm message. A 1-Signal at interface ESTB means that the drive is in stand-by mode. In this mode the drive is monitored for availability even under stand still conditions. If a fault occurs when the drive is in stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
ETFG
Inching release
Interface ETFG must be connected with LOG1 if the drive is to be operated as a positioning drive, i.e. it is to be switched ON and OFF in short intervals (<= 2s).
EMFR
Annunciation release
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This causes no alarms to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation module which has to be engineered for this purpose.
EMZS
Fault interlock to the group
A 1-signal on EMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the status call the drive fault can still be seen. Typical application: To interlock a main drive together with the affiliated auxiliary drive one must connect the feedback contact ERM and the ON command EBE of the auxiliary drive to the protective interlock of the main drive and vice versa. In this case, the group would indicate a fault as soon as one of the two drives is running. To prevent this one must connect ERM and EBE of the auxiliary drive together with OR to interface EMZS of the main drive.
3-7
ELPZ
Lamp test (additional)
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using ELPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
EQIT
Acknowledge (additional)
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be connected to this interface. Caution: Using EQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
EBFE
Command ON
Interface to start the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is started. The interface is normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the associated route(s). The drive is started either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process value STARTDEL). Caution: Interface EBFE should not be connected with a continuous signal as a drive fault can then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required, one must take care that the EBFE has signal zero when there is a fault.
EBFA
Command OFF
Interface to switch off the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is switched off. The interface is normally connected through the negated GDE signal of the associated group(s) or through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s). The drive is switched off either immediately or delayed according to the set stop delay time (process value STOPDEL).
QSTP
Quick stop
In some situations it may be necessary to stop the drives of a group instantaneously (without stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate stopping of the drive in automatic mode (interface EBFA may have a delaying effect). The group module sets during quick stop the signal GQS. Interface QSTP of the drives must be connected with this signal. Typical application: During ship loading, when a chamber of the ship is fully loaded, the ship moves slightly and loading continues immediately. For this, one stops the group with this function immediately (no stop delay), and restarts immediately and the already loaded belts continue to convey.
3-8
DSIG_BQ
Driver Signal(s) Bad Quality
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the motor.
STAT_SC Format BYTE
Status SIMOCODE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter STAT_SC of the Adapter block "C_SIMO_A". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at parameter "REL_SC".
MV_PERC Format INTEGER
Motor current from C_MEASUR
If a measure block for the motor current exists or a SIMOCODE is used, the percentage value of the motor current can be displayed in the faceplate of the motor. Therefore the output MV_PERC of the C_MEASUR or the output I_PERC of C_SIMO_A has to be connected to this interface. Additionally the function must be enabled via REL_MVC or REL_SC. Caution: In case of a measuring value the upper limit 1 of the measure corresponds to 100% value of motor current. In the bar of the drive faceplate 0-130% are displayed.
STA2_B10
Spare input for visualisation
STA2_B10 till STA2_B17 These parameter are transferred to the STATUS2 and can be used for additional purposes for e.g. in the diagnostic window. Look at the table OS-variables.
3-9
Releases
REL_SSM Release software speed monitor Basic state 0-signal REL_SSM must be connected with a 1-signal if you wish to use the function of the software speed monitor. The EDRW interface is then no longer evaluated. The 0-signal causes monitoring of the EDRW interface. This interfaces is not operable through OS.
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-Signal
With 0-Signal at SM_EVS_I, EVS gets 1-Signal after speed monitor has 1-Signal and the speed monitor supervision time has elapsed. With 1-Signal at SM_EVS_I, EVS gets 1-Signal immediately with the 1-Signal of the speed monitor.
REL_EBD
Bypass Speed Monitor
Speed Monitor Bypass can only be enabled/disabled from the Diagnostic Picture. If the Bypass is switched on the speed monitor supervision is not active. Caution: This is no block parameter
REL_MVC
Enable display of motor current
1-signal at this parameter enables the display of motor current in the faceplate and at the same time an additional button appears in order to open the measure faceplate itself. Look also to parameter "MV_PERC"
NSTP_L_A
No stop after switching local
auto
This parameter is foreseen for different project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode, if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled.
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
With 0-signal at this parameter the local-stop is not effective in automatic mode. 1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too and an alarm will be created.
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to enable this function with 1-signal at this parameter. In the faceplate of the drive an additional button appears which allows to open the SIMOCODE faceplate.
3-10
Links
The fault of the drive is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every drive must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint. GR_LINK1 Associated group/route
The GR_LINK1 interface of the drive must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
Associated group /route
If the drive belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
For several groups/route
If the drive belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
3-11
Example of a circuit:
Group1 C_Group MAIN_TASK 1/5
Route1 C_Route MAIN_TASK 1/3
Motor1 C_DRV_1D MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
Group2 C_Group MAIN_TASK 1/6 I G_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK
Group3 C_Group MAIN_TASK 1/7 MUX1 C_MUX G_LINK I BO I Group4 C_Group MAIN_TASK 1/8 I I I I G_LINK I I EN MUX_IN GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 GR_LINK3 GR_LINK4 GR_LINK5 MAIN_TASK 1/1 ENO MUX_OUT BO BO
Caution:
Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
3-12
Process values
The process values can be set during engineering and they can be changed online from the OS. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be connected in the CFC.
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
Default: 4
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. The time for the feedback monitoring is preset as per standard to 4 seconds. If this time is not sufficient, e.g. with motors with star-delta starting, then the set time must be extended correspondingly. The longer time is only valid during the start, for stopping it is still the standard monitoring time of about 4s.
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. In automatic mode the start of the drive is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In singlestart mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 9999) Value in seconds. The stopping of the drive via interface EBFA is delayed by the set time.
SPEEDTIM
Speed monitor monitoring time
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. Within the set time the interface for the speed monitor EDRW must have 1-signal. When this time is exceeded, the drive generates a speed monitor fault. Caution: In the default setting (SM_EVS_I = 0) the EVS signal becomes 1 only after this time has elapsed. In this case this value must be made 0 when no speed monitor is required. Otherwise there will be an unnecessary delay in the starting of the subsequent drives. With SM_EVS_I = 1 the EVS-Signal becomes 1 immediately with the speed monitor signal.
HORN_TIM
Horn time for single start
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During the start of the drive in single-start mode a horn bit (module output HORN) is set for the duration of the set time and the start of the drive is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to trigger a start-up warning.
3-13
TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for software speed monitor
Default: 50
Format INTEGER (1 - 255) Value X * cycle-time. (default setting accords approximately 5 seconds). The software speed monitor should sense an edge change at the pulse input within this time. Only then does the internal output have a 1-signal.
3-14
Output interfaces
EVS Logic signal A 1-signal means drive running in automatic mode or in single-start mode. It is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as a feedback to the route or the group. This signal is not generated in local mode!
EST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs in a running drive, during drive start up or during stand-by mode, the dynamic fault bit is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged. Caution: In the following cases the drive fault cannot be acknowledged: - If the ON-command is permanently active; - With a welded contactor (ERM = 1-signal).
SST
Group fault
A 1-signal means that some fault is still present.
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the drive in single-start mode for a given time period and can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
EVSP
Logic signal for sporadic running drives
A 1-signal means drive has received a start command in automatic mode or in single start mode (Command Memory is ON). The drive starts when the interface ESPO has 1-Signal. The EVSP-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In the Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all driver blocks to simulation mode.
Hardware outputs
EBE Command ON The EBE signal is used to trigger the main contactor.
ELS
Running/fault lamp
The ELS running/fault lamp signals the status of the drive and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the drive is running. Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged). A 0signal indicates that the drive has stopped.
3-15
Interfaces to the OS
TEST_OSS Test interface The test interfaces are only used during module development and must not be changed!
MSG8_EVID Interface to OS
Message ID
COMMAND Interface to OS
Command word
SSM_CVOS Interface to OS
Display counter software speed-monitor
RES_RTOS Interface to OS
Reset time RT for OS
RT_OS Interface to OS
Run-time for OS
RT_H Interface to OS
Run-time for OS refreshed every hour
CNT_OS Interface to OS
Counter contactor for OS
CNT_H Interface to OS
Counter contactor for OS refreshed every hour
INTFC_OS Interface to OS
Interface status for OS
VISU_OS Interface to OS
Status for symbol display
3-16
STATUS Interface to OS
Status word for OS
STATUS2 Interface to OS
Status word for OS
CURR_OS Interface to OS
Display of the motor current
CMEAS_DB Interface to OS
Instance DB of the associated C_MEASUR
3-17
The module must be called before the associated route or group. Any called C_MUX modules must run before this module.
Message characteristics
The module uses the ALARM_8 module to generate annunciations. A plausibility and priority logic at the process level analyses all object faults only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically the fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely. The current operational state of the plant objects is automatically taken into consideration during the fault analysis, e.g. all fault annunciations are suppressed automatically for a stationary group no superfluous fault annunciations are created the operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations. Each fault annunciation is also classified. This shows whether an electrical or a mechanical fault, a process fault or a shut-down with a local safety switch applies. An electrician does not always need to be called first The production operator can give specific instructions.
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "true" annunciations. An annunciation release for each object means that the communication and OS are not overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure. Refer to the OS variables table for the assignment of the annunciation text and annunciation class to the module parameters.
3-18
Module States
Variable VISU_OS: No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status / Display Text

off fault not acknowledged fault running local mode local mode running single mode single mode running
Display Symbol
White Blinking red Red Green Yellow Blinking yellow Blue Blinking blue
Text Presentation
Black, white White, red White, red Black, green Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, blue Black, blue
Also refer to the OS variables table
Commands
Refer to the OS variables table for the assignment of the command word.
3-19
I/O-bar of C_DRV_1D
C_DRV_1D
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U Permitted Values
Element ERM ESB EBM EVO ESP ESR EEVG EBVG ESVG ESVA ESPO EDRW ELOC EEIZ ESTB ETFG EMFR EMZS ELPZ EQIT EBFE EBFA QSTP DSIG_BQ STA2_B10
Meaning Feedback ON Electrical availability Overload Local switch Local stop Local start Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Sporadic on/off Hardware speed monitor Local mode release Single-start mode release Stand-by mode Inching release Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Command ON Command OFF Quick stop Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Spare input transferred into STATUS 2
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
Default 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Attr.
HMI
3-20
Reference Manual Objects Element STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 REL_SSM SW_SPEED SM_EVS_I NSTP_L_A LST_ACT REL_SC STAT_SC REL_MVC MV_PERC TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND FEEDBTIM STARTDEL STOPDEL SPEEDTIM HORN_TIM TOL_SSM GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 Meaning Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Release software speed monitor Pulse signal for software speed monitor EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-signal No stop after switchover local auto Local stop active in automatic mode Enable SIMOCODE Status SIMOCODE enable display of motor current Motor current from C_MEASUR Must not be changed Message ID Command word Feedback time Start delay Stop delay Speed monitor monitoring time Horn time for single start Tolerance value for software speed monitor Associated group/route Associated group/route Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE BOOL BOOL INT Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B#16#0 0 0 0 Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U Attr. U U U U U U U
Unidirectional Drive HMI Permitted Values
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT W#16#0 4 0 0 0 10 50 0 0
+ + + + + + +
3-21
Unidirectional Drive Element MUX_LINK Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format INT Default 0 Typ e I Attr. HMI Permitted Values
For several routes/groups
RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H CNT_OS CNT_H
Reset time RT for OS Run-time for OS Run-time for OS refreshed every hour Counter contactor Counter contactor refreshed every hour
DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0
IO IO IO IO IO
U U U U U
+ + + + +
SSM_CVOS INTFC_OS VISU_OS STATUS STATUS2 ALARM CURR_OS CMEAS_DB EVS EST SST HORN EVSP SIM_ON EBE ELS
Display counter software speed monitor Interface status for OS Status for symbol display Status word 1 Status word 2 Alarm word for test Display of motor current Instance-DB from C_MEASUR Logic signal Dynamic fault Group fault Start-up horn Logic signal sporadic drive Simulation on (Driver) Command ON Lamp
BYTE
B#16#0
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
U U U U U U
+ + + + +
DWORD DW#16#0 BYTE DWORD DWORD WORD INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL B#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
+ +
3-22
OS-Variable table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Presentation Number/NK
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
COMMAND
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 OFF ON R_RTOS BDW_on/off 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
AUS EIN Laufzeit lschen
Commandword
OFF ON Reset Running Time OS
I/O
16Bit OM OM OM OM
Brcke Drehwchter EIN/AUS Bypass Speed monitor ON/OFF
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
3-23
STATUS
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 LOCAL EIZ BDW SSM HORN EST ERM SC_FT ESS ESB EVO EBM ESD ESV LST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Betriebsart Vorort Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Brcke Drehwchter Softwaredrehwchter Anfahtwarnung Strung nicht quittiert Rckmeldung EIN Strung SIMOCODE Strung Schtz Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung Vorort Strung Bimetall Strung Drehwchter Strung Schutzverriegelung Strung Vorort Stop
Status
Local mode Single start mode released Bypass speed monitor Software speed mon. output Start up warning Fault not acknowledged Feedback ON General fault SIMOCODE Contactor fault Electrical availabilitv fault Local switch fault Overload fault Speed monitor fault Protection interlock fault Local Stop Fault
S,O
16Bit
SQT SST BQU EVS EVS_SP EKS ON_DLY OFF_DLY VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU
Sequenz Test Sammelstrung Signal Strung verknpfungssignal verknpfungssignal sporad. Komando Speicher Einschaltverzgerung Ausschaltverzgerung
Sequence test general fault Bad Quality of signals Running Signal Running Signal sporadic drive Command memory ON delay OFF delay
3-24
STA2_OS
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 REL_SC WA_SC REL_MVC LST_ACT ERM ESB EBM EVO ESP ESR EBE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Rckmeldung EIN Schaltbereitschaft Bimetall Vorortschalter Vorort Stop Vorort Start Befehl Ein
Status
Feedback ON El. Availability Overload Local Switch Local Stop Local Start Command ON / OFF
S,O
16Bit
Freigabe SIMOCODE Warnung SIMOCODE Freigabe Anzeige Strom Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik
Enable SIMOCODE General Warning SIMOCODE Enable display of current Local stop active in automatic
Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter Reserve Parameter
Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter Reserve parameter
3-25
VISU_OS
dezimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Zustand fr Symbol und Texte Steht Strung nicht quittiert Strung quittiert Luft Vorortbetrieb steht Luft in Vorortbetrieb Einzelbetrieb steht Luft in Einzelbetrieb
Status for Symbol and Text off fault not acknowledged Fault acknowledged running local mode local mode running single mode single mode running
S,O
Byte
ALARM
ALA_ESS ALA_ESB ALA_EVO ALA_EBM ALA_ESD ALA_LST ALA_SIG7 ALA_REP SIG1 SIG2 SIG3 SIG4 SIG5 SIG6 SIG7 SIG8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Strung Schtz Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung Vorort Strung Bimetall Strung Drehwchter Vorort Stop Strung noch vorhanden Rckmeldezeit Einschaltverzgerung Drehwchterberwachungszeit Hupzeit fr Einzelstart Ausschaltverzgerung Toleranz Softwaredrehwchter Istwert Software Drehwchter Betriebszeit in sek fr OS Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit Betriebszeit fr MIS akt. Je Stunde INT Anzeige Motorstrom in % INT Instanz-DB vom C_MEASUR
Alarm
Contactor fault Electrical availability fault Local switch fault Overload fault Speed monitor fault local stop Still Faulty feedback time start delay speed monitor time time for start up warning stop delay Tolerance speed monitor actual value software speed monitor run time in sec for OS reset time for runtime OS run time for MIS refreshed every h Display of motor current in % Instance DB of motor current D D D D D D D D D xxx xxxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxxxx Datum/U hr sek. sek. sek. sek. sek. I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O O
16Bit ALF ALF E E ESS ESB
ALF S EVO ALF M EBM ALF M DER ALF S LST ALF 0-999 0-9999 0-999 0-999 0-999 1-255 1-255 x/3600 Datum/Uhr Dword OM OM OM OM OM OM P REP
FEEDBTIM STARTDEL SPEEDTIM HORN_TIM STOPDEL TOL_SSM SSM_CVOS RT_OS RES_RTOS RT_H CURR_OS CMEAS_DB
3-26
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 EEVG EBVG ESVG ESVA ESPO EDRW 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Nahtstellenwort
Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Schutzverriegelung Schutzverriegelung (nur Automatikb.) Sporadisch Ein/Aus Drehwchter
Interfaceword
Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock (allways activ) Protection interlock (only automat.) Sporadic ON/OFF Speed monitor
Bit
32Bit
ELOC EEIZ ESTB ETFG
Vorortbetrieb Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Freigabe Betriebsart Stand-by Tipp-Freigabe
Local mode release Single start mode release Stand-by mode Inching release
REL_SSM REL_EVS_I
Freigabe Software Drehw. rel sofware Speed monitor Freigabe EVS sofor bei EDRW EVS=1 immediately when EDRW=1
EMFR EMZS
Meldefreigabe Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe
Annunciation release Fault interlock to group
ELPZ EQIT
Lampen prfen (Zusatz) Quittieren (Zusatz)
Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional)
EBFE EBFA QSTP
Befehl Ein Befehl Aus Schnellstop
Command ON Command OFF Quick stop
3-27
28 Unidirectional Drive
Damper
4 Damper
4 DAMPER
Description of C_DAMPER Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating Principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Hardware outputs Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_DAMPER OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 5 5 7 13 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 20 21 22 23 27
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\04_K_e.doc
4-1
Damper
Description of C_DAMPER
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_DAMPER FB1002
Calling OBs
C_DAMPER must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
4-2
Damper
Function
With the damper module one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of reversible drives (dampers). The module monitors the electrical availability KSB, overload KBM, the position of the local switch in automatic mode KVO and the limit switches in both directions (limit switches must be reached within the supervision time and damper must not move away from the limit switches without any command). The supervision of torque switches and additional protection signals is also possible. It is possible to activate a special wagging function which responses of torque switches, or the responses of the overshooting of the maximum runtime. For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this block with the CEMAT-adapter-block "C_SIMO_A", which communicates with the SIMOCODE basic-unit.
Definition of the Limit Positions: Limit Position 1 = closed Limit Position 2 = open
Alarm messages: In the event of a fault the damper generates an alarm message. Additional protection signals switch off the damper but they cannot be annunciated in detail by the damper module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal to display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization: All damper statuses are made available for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard for OS provides block icons for status display as well as faceplates for the display of more detailed information.
4-3
Damper
Operating modes: The damper module has 5 types of operating modes: Automatic mode Single-start mode Local mode Positioning mode Inching mode Controlling both directions is done through the associated group. Control for each damper separately is possible via the OS Via the PLC (Control with local switches) The setpoint can be given from the faceplate or the setpoint can be taken from external via parameter of the block. One can run the damper either with 2 buttons from the faceplate, or 2 signals can be connected to the parameters of the block.
Priority of the operating modes: 1 = highest priority Prio.

1 2 3 4 5 Local mode Positioning mode Inching from faceplate or buttons Single start mode Open loop control mode (automatic)
Operating mode
Condition at Parameters
KLOC=1 + KVO=0 KTFG=1 + KPOS=1 KTFG=1 + KPOS=0 KEIZ=1 KLOC=0 + KEIZ=0 + KPOS=0
Changing the operating modes The operating modes are changed by the signal status of the parameters at the block. The group module provides signals for the enable of the local mode and the single start mode.
Sequence Test In Sequence Test mode the damper can be started without hardware signals. The limit switches are simulated. The hardware inputs (KSB; KBM; KVO...) are still active and have to be simulated by a test program at the beginning of OB1 Cycle. If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the damper can be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver blocks to enable the simulation.
4-4
Damper
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
KWE1 Limit position 1 Basic state 0-signal The KWE1 parameter is used to monitor the "closed" limit position of the damper. A 1-signal at KWE1 means that the "closed" limit position has been reached. The connection of the KWE1 parameter is made with the make contact of the position limit switch. The break contact is switched directly in the contactor control circuit.
KWE2
Limit position 2
The KWE2 parameter is used to monitor the "open" limit position of the damper. A 1-signal at KWE2 means that the "open" limit position has been reached. The connection of the KWE2 parameter is made with the make contact of the position limit switch. The break contact is switched directly in the contactor control circuit.
KSB
The KSB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the damper. The electrical availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shut down with an alarm.
KBM
Overload
The KBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the damper (bimetal). The overload is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shut down with an alarm.
KVO
Local switch
The KVO parameter is used for connecting the local switch of the damper. The KVO = 1-signal means the Automatic position and the KVO = 0-signal means the Local position. No alarm signal occurs in the control room in local mode. In position Local (KVO = 0-signal) the damper can be started via KCL and KOP and stopped via KSP.
KSP
Local stop
The KSP parameter is used to stop the damper in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. a 0signal stops the damper. By default the local stop KSP is only active if the damper is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
KCL
Local start direction 1
The KCL parameter is used to close the damper in local mode. A 1-signal at KCL starts the damper in direction 1. The prerequisite for closing the damper from local is the local release (KLOC interface = 1signal) and the position of the KVO switch at local (KVO = 0-signal).
4-5
Damper
KOP
The KOP parameter is used to open the damper in local mode. The 1-signal at KOP starts the damper in direction 2. The prerequisite for opening the damper from local is the local release (KLOC interface = 1signal) and the position of the KVO switch at local (KVO = 0-signal).
4-6
Damper
Input interfaces
KEV1 Start interlock direction 1 Basic state 1-signal The damper can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1-signal. A 0-signal at interface KEV1 prevents the operation in direction 1. In local mode the start interlock is not effective.
KBV1
Operating interlock direction 1
The damper can be operated in automatic mode or in single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1-signal. A 0-signal at interface KBV1 prevents the starting or switches off the damper. In local mode the operating interlock is not effective.
KSV1
Protection interlock direction 1
All signals which indicate a damper fault and which are not monitored by the damper module as standard must be connected to the protection interlock. A 1-signal means status OK, a 0-signal means fault. Interfaces KSV1 and KSV2 are effective in all operating modes of the damper. Caution: When the damper is switched off via KSV1 or KSV2, the damper module does not generate an alarm message. For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protection interlock one must use the output MAU of the associated annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration. Remark: In older standard versions, interfaces KSV1/KSV2 were used for the torque monitoring. This interfacing is still possible but today it is much easier with interfaces KDR1 and KDR2.
KDR1
Torque switch direction 1
A 1-signal at interface KDR1 or KDR2 means the torque switch has responded. Depending on how interface KWED is connected, this fault is analysed and annunciated immediately or the damper resorts to wagging (see KWED).
KEV2 See KEV1
Start interlock direction 2
KBV2 See KBV1
KSV2 See KSV1
Protection interlock direction 2
KDR2 See KDR1
Torque switch direction 2
4-7
Damper
KLOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface enables the damper for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the damper can be controlled via inputs KOP and KCL. The operation mode is changed by the associated group. The group module sets the local mode signal GLO. This information is passed on to the damper module by connecting interface KLOC with signal GLO of the associated group. In local mode via the PLC only protection interlock KSV1/KSV2 is effective. The connection of interfaces KEV1/KEV2 and KBV1/KBV2 are not analysed in local mode.
KEIZ
A 1-signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the damper, i.e. the damper can be controlled individually from the central control room. The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES. This information is passed on to the damper module by connecting interface KEIZ with signal GES of the associated group. In single-start mode all interlocks of the damper module are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
KSTB
Stand-by mode
In the philosophy of CEMAT-Standards only the active plant sections can generate alarm messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty, this is indicated in the symbol at the flow mimic but there will be no alarm message. A 1-Signal at interface KSTB means that the damper is in stand-by mode. In this mode the damper is monitored for availability. If a fault occurs when the damper is in stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
KPOS
Positioner
For dampers with positioning functions the interfaces KPOS and KTFG must be connected with a 1-signal and an actual value for the damper position (0-100%) must be connected to the damper module using parameter POS_IN. If you want to inch the damper outputs directly, then the interface has to be KPOS=0 and KTFG=1.
KTFG
Inching release
To position the damper (through positioning function of the damper or manually via +/pushbuttons) the inching release must have a 1-signal. A 1-signal at interface KTFG blocks the control via KEB1 and KEB2 as well as the control in single-start mode. The run-time monitoring is not effective.
KWEE
External setpoint ON
Only for dampers with a positioning function! When interface KWEE has a 1-signal the damper module reads the setpoint from input interface KWEX. This function is used if the setpoint is specified by a primary controller. In this case, one must connect the output of the corresponding controller to interface KWEX of the damper.
4-8
Damper
KSNF
Setpoint tracking
Only for dampers with positioning function! In the operating mode positioning, the setpoints track each other. If KSNF = 0, the setpoints are not tracked to the actual value.
KWED
Wagging code
The connection of wagging code KWED with 1-signal causes the damper to wag when the runtime is exceeded or when the torque switch is activated. This means the damper returns to the old limit position and makes a new attempt to move in the required direction etc. The number of attempts depends on the set wagging count (process value WAGG_NO). When the set number of wagging attempts is exceeded the damper signals a mechanical fault. When wagging code KWED has 0-signal the response of the torque switch leads to direct switching off and the damper signals torque switch fault.
KWU1
Changeover limit switch, make/break contact Basic state 1-signal
The standard module expects a make contact as the limit switch, i.e. when the limit position is reached then parameter KWE1 has 1-signal. A make contact may not always be available as limit switch (if e.g. the contacts were used elsewhere). In such cases if the interface KWU1 is programmed to have 0-signal, the limit switch is interpreted as a break contact.
KWU2 See KWU1
Changeover limit switch, make/break contact Basic state 1-signal
KMFR
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this, one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface of the appropriate modules. This causes no alarm to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation module which has to be engineered for this purpose.
KMZS
A 1-signal on KMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the status call the drive fault can still be seen.
KLP1
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using KLP1 the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected. There is only one interface for both direction 1 and direction 2.
4-9
Damper
KQT1
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be connected to this interface. Caution: Using KQT1 the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected. There is only one interface for both direction 1 and direction 2.
KHA1
Manual command (inching direction 1)
Interfaces KHA1 and KHA2 are effective only in conjunction with inching release KTFG. They are used for manual positioning of the damper with +/- pushbuttons (conventional control desk). Damper output KB1 is given only as long as interface KHA1 has 1-signal.
KEB1
Command ON (direction 1)
Interface to move the damper in direction 1 in automatic mode. With 1-signal the damper is switched on. The GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the associated route(s) is normally connected to this interface. Caution: Interfaces KEB1 and KEB2 must not be connected with a continuous signal because then the damper fault cannot be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required (e.g. for fan dampers) one must take care that the ON command becomes zero in the event of a fault (see engineering manual "Fan dampers").
KAB1
Command OFF (direction 1)
A 1-signal at this interface switches off the damper in direction 1 in automatic mode. This is actually needed only if the damper is to be switched off in an intermediate position (e.g. with dampers with 3 limit switches - see engineering manual).
KHA2 See KHA1
Manual command (inching direction 2)
KEB2 See KEB1
Command ON (direction 2)
KAB2 See KAB1
Command OFF (direction 2)
4-10
Damper
DSIG_BQ
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the damper.
STA2_B10
4-11
Damper
STAT_SC Format BYTE
Status SIMOCODE
Default: 0
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter of the Adapter block "C_SIMO_A". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at parameter "REL_SC".
POS_LZ
Live-zero position
Only for dampers with positioning function! The POS_LZ interface must be connected with the Live-Zero signal of the analog value for the damper position, so that the damper recognizes that the position value is erroneous.
KWEX
External setpoint
Default: 0.0
Format REAL Only for dampers with positioning function! If the setpoint is specified by a primary function (e.g. Controller ), then the value must be transferred into this input interface. It is effective if KWEE has a 1-Signal.
POS_IN
Position value (0-100%)
Default: 0.0
Format REAL. Only for dampers with a positioning function! The POS_IN interface must be connected with the damper position (actual value of the positioner). Caution: The value must be 0-100!
4-12
Damper
Releases
LST_ACT Local Stop active Basic state 0-signal With 0-signal at this parameter the local-stop is not effective in automatic mode. 1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too and an alarm will be created.
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to enable this function with 1-signal at this parameter. In the faceplate of the damper an additional button appears which allows to open the SIMOCODE faceplate.
Links
The fault of the damper is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every damper must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
Associated group/route
The GR_LINK1 interface of the damper must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the damper belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
For several groups/routes
If the damper belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the damper. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
4-13
Damper
Damper1 C_DAMPER MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
4-14
Damper
Process values
LSMONTIM
Limit switch delay time
Default: 2
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. If the damper leaves the limit position without any command, this is interpreted as a mechanical fault. This monitoring is delayed by the set time.
RTMONTIM
Run-time monitoring
Default: 90
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. The run-time monitoring is effective only in automatic mode and single-start mode, in fact only when the damper is moved from one limit position to the other limit position (not, if inching release KTFG has 1-signal). The damper module checks whether the target limit position is reached within the set time. If this time is exceeded the damper annunciates the run-time fault as a mechanical fault. This run-time monitoring must be adjusted depending on the damper run-time. The set time applies to both directions.
WAGG_NO
Wagging counter
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Number of wagging attempts. If the wagging release KWED has 1-signal when a run-time fault occurs or the torque limit switch is activated, the damper returns to the start position and then tries to run again in the required direction. This process is called wagging. The number of wagging attempts can be set here. After an unsuccessful number of wagging attempts mechanical fault annunciation is generated.
HORN_TIM
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. When the damper is triggered in single-start mode, a horn bit (module output) is set for the duration of the set time and the start of the damper is delayed. The horn bit can be connected further for the triggering of a start-up warning.
W_OS Format REAL
Setpoint of OS
Default: 0.0
Interface for the setpoint specification of the OS.
KWUG Format REAL
Setpoint lower limit
Default: 0.0
The default setting corresponds to the scale beginning for the setpoint of the damper position.
4-15
Damper
KWOG Format REAL
Setpoint upper limit
Default: 100.0
The default setting corresponds to the scale end for the setpoint of the damper position. SCB Format REAL Scale beginning for the setpoint of the damper position. Scale beginning Default: 0.0
SCE Format REAL
Scale end
Default: 100.0
Scale end for the setpoint of the damper position.
UNIT Format STRING
Unit
Default: %
Unit of the setpoint of the damper position.
TMIN
Minimum pulse length
Default: 0.5
Format REAL (0.0 - 9.9) Value in seconds. Here, the smallest pulse width to be output as damper commands is set. This pulse width must be longer than the cycle time.
TM
Actuator runtime
Default: 60.0
Format REAL (0 - 999) Value in seconds. This is the run-time for the damper to travel from one limit position to the other. It has an effect on the length of the pulses to be output. In contrast to the run-time monitoring, which is always set as a higher value, you must enter the actual run-time here.
AN
Hysteresis response threshold
Default: 1
Format REAL (0.0 - 9.9) Value in %. This is the beginning of the dead zone. If the deviation exceeds this percentage value the positioner starts to output pulses.
AB
Hysteresis dropout threshold
Default: 0.5
Format REAL (0.0 - 9.9) Value in %. This is the end of the dead zone. If the deviation is smaller than this percentage value the positioner does not output further pulses.
4-16
Damper
Output interfaces
KVS1 Logic signal A 1-signal means "Damper in limit position 1". The logic signal is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as feedback for the route or the group.
KVS2
Logic signal
A 1-signal means "Damper in limit position 2". The logic signal is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as feedback for the route or the group.
KST1/KST2
Dynamic fault
If a fault occurs during the triggering of the damper module, or during stand-by mode the dynamic fault bits are set. They remaining set until the fault is acknowledged. Caution: In the following cases the damper fault cannot be acknowledged. - If the ON command is constantly present; - If both limit switches have responded at the same time. (switch cogged)
SST
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the damper in single-start mode for a given time period and can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON of the damper can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all driver blocks to simulation mode.
KPO
Positioner ON
A 1-signal means that the damper is in positioning mode. The negated KPO Signal can be used to switch the primary controller to local mode.
4-17
Damper
Hardware outputs
KB1 Command direction 1 The KB1 signal is used to trigger the main contactor in direction 1 to close the damper.
KB2
Command direction 2
The KB2 signal is used to trigger the main contactor in direction 2 to open the damper.
W_ACT_O
Active Set point
Active Set point in positioning mode. This signal can be used, if the damper is controlled via analog output (instead of using the digital output signal KB1 and KB2).
KL1
Lamp 1
The KL1 lamp indicates the status of the damper and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the damper has reached the limit position 1 (closed). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
KL2
Lamp 2
The KL2 lamp indicates the status of the damper and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the damper has reached the limit position 2 (open). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
4-18
Damper
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS Test interface The test interfaces are used during module development and must not be changed!
Message ID
Command word
X_POS_OS Interface to OS
Damper position display
Reset time for number of movements for OS
Number of movements for OS
RT_H Interface to MIS
Number of movements refreshed every hour
Status word 1
Status word 2
4-19
Damper
4-20
Damper
Module states
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Status / Text
limit position 2 limit position 1 moving to position 2 moving to position 1 fault not acknowledged fault acknowledged no limit position fault acknowledged position 1 fault acknowledged position 2 local mode position 2 local mode position 1 local mode moving to position 2 local mode moving to position 1 local mode no limit position single mode position 2 single mode position 1 single mode moving to position 2 single mode moving to position 1 single mode no limit position
Symbol Display
Green Green Blinking green Blinking green Blinking red Red Gray Red Red Yellow Yellow Blinking yellow Blinking yellow Blinking gray Cyan Cyan Blinking cyan Blinking cyan Blinking cyan
Text Presentation
Black , green Black , white Black , green Black , white White , red White , red Black , white White , red White , red Black , yellow Black , yellow Black , yellow Black , yellow Black , yellow Black , blue Black , blue Black , blue Black , blue Black , blue
4-21
Damper
Status display of a positioning damper: 1st column: C = control operation T = inching operation P = positioning operation E = external setpoint D = damper fault A = analog value fault Display (bitmap)
2nd column: 3rd column: 4th column: No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Status
Controlled Controlled + damper fault Controlled + analog value fault Controlled + damper fault + analog value fault Inching operation Inching operation + damper fault Inching operation + analog value fault Inching operation + damper fault + analog value fault Positioning operation Positioning operation + damper fault Positioning operation + analog value fault Positioning operation + damper fault + analog value fault Positioning operation + ext. setpoint Positioning operation + ext. setpoint + damper fault Positioning operation + ext. setpoint + analog value fault Positioning operation + ext. setpoint + damper fault + analog value fault
Commands
4-22
Damper
I/O-bar of C_DAMPER
C_DAMPER
Permitted Values
Element KWE1 KWE2 KSB KBM KVO KSP KCL KOP KEV1 KBV1 KSV1 KDR1 KEV2 KBV2 KSV2 KDR2 KLOC KEIZ KSTB KWED KWU1 KWU2 KMFR KMZS
Meaning Limit position 1 Limit position 2 Electrical availability Overload Local switch Local stop Local start direction 1 Local start direction 2 Start interlock direction 1 Operating interlock direction 1 Protection interlock direction 1 Torque switch direction 1 Start interlock direction 2 Operating interlock direction 2 Protection interlock direction 2 Torque switch direction 2 Local mode release Single-start mode release Stand-by mode Wagging code Changeover limit switch 1 1=N.O. 0=N.C. Changeover limit switch 2 1=N.O. 0=N.C. Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
Default 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U
HMI
4-23
Damper Element KLP1 KQT1 KHA1 KEB1 KAB1 KHA2 KEB2 KAB2 DSIG_BQ STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 LST_ACT REL_SC STAT_SC TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND LSMONTIM RTMONTIM WAGG_NO HORN_TIM Meaning Lamp test Acknowledge
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE INT Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B#16#0 0 Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U + + + + + U U U U U U U U U U U U U HMI Permitted Values
Manual command 1 (inching) Command ON direction 1 Command OFF direction 1 Manual command 2 (inching) Command ON direction 2 Command OFF direction 2 Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Local stop active in automatic mode Enable SIMOCODE Status SIMOCODE Must not be changed Message ID Command word Limit switch monitoring time Run-time monitoring controller Wagging counter Horn time for single-start mode
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT W#16#0 10 15 0 0
4-24
Reference Manual Objects Element KTFG KPOS KSNF W_OS KWUG KWOG KWEE KWEX SCB SCE UNIT POS_IN POS_LZ TMIN TM AN AB GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK Meaning Inching release Positioner Setpoint tracking Setpoint of OS (KWCO) Setpoint lower limit Setpoint upper limit External setpoint active External setpoint Scale beginning Scale end Unit Position value 0-100 Live-zero for position Min. pulse length Actuator run-time Switch on of the dead zone Switch off of the dead zone Associated group/route Associated group/route For several routes/groups Format BOOL BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL BOOL REAL REAL REAL STRING [8]
STRUCT BOOL
Damper Default 0 0 1 0.000000 e+000 0.000000 e+000 1.000000 e+002 0 0.000000 e+000 0.000000 e+000 1.000000 e+002
%
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
HMI
Permitted Values
+ + +
+ + +
0 5.000000 e-001 3.000000 e+001 1.000000 e+000 1.000000 e+000 0 0 0
I I I I I I I I
REAL REAL REAL REAL INT INT INT
+ + + +
RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_MH
Reset time for number of movements for OS
DWORD DW#16#0
IO IO IO
U U U
+ + +
Number of movements for OS DWORD DW#16#0 Run-time for MIS refresh every hour DWORD DW#16#0
X_POS_OS INTFC_OS
Damper position display Interface status for OS
REAL
0.000000 e+000
O O
U U
+ +
DWORD DW#16#0
4-25
Damper Element VISU_OS STATUS STATUS2 ALARM KWUG_O KWOG_O SCB_O SCE_O W_ACT_O KVS1 KVS2 KST1 KST2 SST HORN SIM_ON KPO KB1 KB2 KL1 KL2 Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BYTE WORD WORD WORD REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default B#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 0.000000 e+000 1.000000 e+002 0.000000 e+000 1.000000 e+002 0.000000 e+000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type Attr. O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U U U U U U U U U U U U + + + + HMI + + + Permitted Values
Status for symbol display Status word 1 Status word 2 Alarm word for test Setpoint lower limit Setpoint upper limit Scale beginning Scale end Setpoint Output Logic signal 1 Logic signal 2 Dynamic fault 1 Dynamic fault 2 Group fault Start-up horn Simulation ON (driver) Positioner ON Command direction 1 Command direction 2 Lamp 1 Lamp 2
4-26
Damper
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
OS-Variable
Output Level
Fault Class
OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM
Designation German
Designation English
Commandword
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 ISD1 ISD2 IFD1 IFD2 OFF ON1 ON2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Commandword
Commandword
16Bit
Tippen langsam Richtung 1 Tippen langsam Richtung 2 Tippen schnell Richtung 1 Tippen schnell Richtung 2 STOP EIN Richtung 1 EIN Richtung 2 Rcksetzen Zhler Anzahl R_RTOS 15 Bewegungen
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Inching slow direction 1 Inching slow direction 2 Inching fast direction 1 Inching fast direction 2 OFF ON direction 1 ON direction 2 reset No. of operations (OIS)
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\04_K_e.doc
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
4-27
Damper
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 LOC EIZ HORN KPO LST ULZ KST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Status
Vorortbetrieb freigegeben Einzelbetrieb freigegeben Anfahr-Hupe Positionierer EIN Strung Vorort Stop Positionsmewert live zero Dynamische Strung
Status
Local mode released Single-start mode released Start-up warning Positioner ON Fault local stop position value live zero dynamic fault
S,O
Bit
16Bit
KSB KVO KBM KSV KM1 KM2 KDR1 KDR2 SQT SST BQU KVS1 KVS2 STEU TIPP POSI VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung / Betriebsart Vorortschalter (Antrieb steht nicht auf Automatik) Strung Bimetall Strung Schutzverriegelung Strung mechanisch Richtung 1 Strung mechanisch Richtung 2 Strung Drehmoment Richtung 1 Strung Drehmoment Richtung 2 Sequenz Test Sammelstrung Signal Strung Position 1 Position 2 Betriebsart Steuerung Tippbetrieb Positionierbetrieb
Electrical availability fault Local fault / operating mode local switch (drive not in automatic) Overload fault Protection interlock fault Mechanical fault direction 1 Mechanical fault direction 2 Torque fault direction 1 Torque fault direction 2 Sequence test fault Bad Quality of signals Position 1 Position 2 Control mode Inching mode Positioner mode
4-28
Damper
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 KWE1 KWE2 KSB KBM KVO KSP KCL KOP KB1 KB2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status
Endstellung 1 Endstellung 2 Schaltbereitschaft Bimetall Vorortschalter Vorort Stop Vorort Richtung 1 Vorort Richtung 2 Befehl Richtung 1
Status
Limit position 1 Limit position 2 El. availability Overload Local switch Local Stop Local Direction 1 Local Direction 2 Command Direction 1 Command Direction 2
S,O
16Bit
9 Befehl Richtung 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Freigabe Simocode 17 Warnung Simocode 18 Externer Sollwert 19 Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
REL_SC WA_SC W_EX LST_AC T
Enable Simocode General Warning Simocode ext. Setpoint Local stop active in automatic
4-29
Damper
VISU_OS
dezimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Zustand fr Symbol und Texte Endlage 2 Endlage 1 Luft in Richtung 2 Luft in Richtung 1 Strung nicht quittiert Strung quittiert Keine Endlage Strung quittiert Endlage 1 Strung quittiert Endlage 2 Vorortbetrieb Endlage 2 Vorortbetrieb Endlage 1 Vorort luft in Richtung 2 Vorort luft in Richtung 1 Vorort keine Endlage Einzelbetrieb Endlage 2 Einzelbetrieb Endlage 1 Einzelbetrieb luft in Richt. 2 Einzelbetrieb luft in Richt. 1 Einzelbetrieb keine Endlage
Status for Symbol and Text limit position 2 limit position 1 moving to position 2 moving to position 1 fault not acknowledged fault ackniwledged no limit position fault acknowledged position 1 fault acknowledged position 2 local mode position 2 local mode position 1 local mode moving to position 2 local mode moving to position 1 local mode no limit position single mode position 2 single mode position 1 single mode moving to position 2 single mode moving to position 1 Single mode no limit position
S,O
Byte
4-30
Damper
AlarmWord
ALA_KSB ALA_KVO ALA_KBM ALA_KM1 ALA_KM2 ALA_KDR1 ALA_KDR2 ALA_REP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung / Betriebsart Vorortschalter (Antrieb steht nicht auf Automatik) Strung Bimetall Strung Mechanisch Richtung 1 Strung Mechanisch Richtung 2 Strung Drehmomentschalter Richt. 1 Strung Drehmomentschalter Richt. 2 Strung noch vorhanden Endschalterverzgerungszeit Laufzeitberwachung Wedelzahl Hupzeit fr Einzelstart Sollwert Sollgrenze min Sollgrenze max. SKA SKE Dimension minimale Impulslnge Stellgliedlaufzeit Ansprechschw. Totzone Abfallschwelle Totzone Klappenposition
Alarm
Electrical availability fault Local fault / operating mode local switch Overload fault Mechanical fault direction 1 Mechanical fault direction 2 Torque fault direction 1 Torque fault direction 2 still faulty Limit switch delay time Run time supervision Wagging number time for start up warning Setpoint Setpoint limit min Setpoint limit max SCB SCE Unit minimum pulse length Actuator run time Hysteresis resp. threshold AN Hysteresis dropout "
S,O
Byte E S M M M M M P KSB KVO KBM KM1 KM2 KDR1 KDR2 REP
LSMONTIM RTMONTIM WAGG_NO HORN_TIM W_OS KWUG KWOG SCB SCE UNIT TMIN TM AN AB X_POS_OS RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H
D D D D D D D D S,O,D S,O,D D D D D S,O,D D D D
xxx sec. xxx sec. xxx xxx sec. xxxx.xx xxxx.xx xxxx.xx xxxx.xx xxxx.xx x.y xxx x.y x.y xxx.y xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx sec. sec. sec. sec. %
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O O
0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 SKA-SKE SKA-WOG WUG-SKE SCA-SCE SCA-SCE 0.0-9.9 0-999 0.0-9.9 0.0-9.9 0.0-100.0 Dword DWord Dword
OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM
Position of the damper Reset time for No. Of operations Resetzeit Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS for OS Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS No. of operations for OS Anzahl Schaltvorgnge pro h fr No. of operations refreshed per h
4-31
Damper
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 KEV1 KBV1 KSV1 KDR1 KEV2 KBV2 KSV2 KDR2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Nahtstellen-Zustand
Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Schutzverriegelung Drehmomentendschalter Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Schutzverriegelung Drehmomentendschalter
Interfaceflags
Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock Torque switch Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock Torque switch
Bit
32Bit
KLOC KEIZ KSTB KTFG KPOS KWEE KSNF KWED KWU1 KWU2 KMFR KMZS KLP1 KQT1
Vorortbetrieb Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Freigabe Betriebsart Stand-by Tipp-Freigabe Positionierer Externer Sollwert ein Sollwert nachfhren
Local mode release Single-start mode release Stand-by mode Inching release Positioner External setpoint ON Setpoint tracking Wagging release Changeover limit switch 1=N.O 0= N.C. Changeover limit switch 1=N.O 0= N.C. Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional)
16 Wedelkennung Umschaltung Endschalter 17 1=Schliesser 0= ffner Umschaltung Endschalter 18 1=Schliesser 0= ffner 19 Meldefreigabe 20 Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe 21 Lampen prfen (Zusatz) 22 Quittieren (Zusatz) 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Handbefehl (Tippen) Befehl Ein Befehl Aus Handbefehl (Tippen) Befehl Ein Befehl Aus
KHA1 KEB1 KAB1 KHA2 KEB2 KAB2
Manual command (inching) Command ON Command OFF Manual command (inching) Command ON Command OFF
4-32
Valve
5 Valve
5 VALVE
Description of C_VALVE Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating Principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_VALVE OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 4 4 5 9 9 10 11 12 14 15 15 16 16 17 20
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\05_V_e.doc
5-1
Valve
Description of C_VALVE
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_VALVE FB1007
Calling OBs
C_VALVE must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
5-2
Valve
Function
With the valve module one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of valves. The module monitors as per standard the limit positions VE1 and VE2, electrical availability VSB and the position of the local switch in automatic mode VVO. In the event of a fault the module switches off the valve. For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this block with the CEMAT-adapter-block "C_SIMO_A", which communicates with the SIMOCODE basic-unit.
Alarm messages: In the event of a fault the valve module generates an alarm message. Additional protection signals (normally not required) do switch off the valve but they cannot be analysed in detail by the valve module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal in order to display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization: The valve conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT standard for OS provides block icons for status display (limit position, faulty, operating mode) as well as faceplates for the display of more detailed information.
Operating modes: The valve module has 3 operating modes: - Automatic mode (Open/close is done through the associated group). - Single-start mode (Open/close for each valve separately is possible via OS). - Local mode via the PLC (Open/close with local switch) The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module generates a release signal for the respective operating mode. This signal must be connected to the appropriate operating mode release interface of the valve module.
Sequence Test In Sequence Test mode the Valve can be started without hardware signals. The limit switches are simulated. The hardware inputs (VSB; VVO...) are still active and have to be simulated by a test program at the beginning of OB1 Cycle. If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the damper can be connected to input SIM_ON of the Driver blocks to enable the simulation.
5-3
Valve
Operating Principle
Hardware inputs
VE1 Limit position 1 Basic state 1-signal The VE1 parameter is used to monitor the "closed" limit position of the valve. A 1-signal at VE1 means that the "closed" limit position has been reached. The connection of the VE1 parameter is made with the position limit-switch of the valve. If no limit switch is present, the interface VKR1 must be connected with LOG1.
VE2
Limit position 2
The VE2 parameter is used to monitor the "open" limit position of the valve. A 1-signal at VE2 means that the "open" limit position has been reached. The connection of the VE2 parameter is made with the position limit-switch of the valve.
VSB
The VSB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the valve. The electrical availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode and results in a shut down with an alarm.
VVO
Local switch
The VVO parameter is used for connecting the local switch of the valve. VVO = 1-signal means Automatic position and VVO = 0-signal means Local position. No alarm signal occurs in the control room in local mode. In position Local (VVO = 0-signal) the valve can be opened via VOP and closed via VCL.
VCL
Local direction 1
The VCL parameter is used to close the valve in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. a 0signal closes the valve. By default the local stop VCL is only active if the valve is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to LST_ACT, the VCL is always effective.
VOP
Local direction 2
The VOP parameter is used to open the valve in local mode. A 1-signal at VOP opens the valve. Local mode must be released (VLOC interface = 1-signal) and the VVO switch set to local (VVO = 0-Signal) to permit the local triggering of the value. Caution: The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the limit position is reached. For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.
5-4
Valve
Input interfaces
VEVG Start interlock Basic state 1-signal The valve can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1-signal. 0-signal at interface VEVG prevents the start. In local mode the start interlock is not effective.
VBVG
Operating interlock
The valve can be operated in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1-signal. 0-signal at interface VBVG prevents the start or switches off the valve. In local mode the operating interlock is not effective. Typical application: Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running can the valve be opened. As soon as the upstream drive fails the valve must close as well. For this, interface VBVG must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both, drive and valve. As soon as the upstream drive is running the operating interlock of the valve has 1-signal and the valve is also started.
VSVG
Protection interlock
All signals which indicate a valve fault and which are not monitored by the valve module as per standard must be connected to the protection interlock. 1-signal means status OK, 0-signal means faulty. Interface VSVG is effective for all operating modes of the valve. Caution: When the valve is switched off via VSVG the valve module does not generate an alarm message. For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protection interlock one must use the output MAU of the associated annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
VSPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface VSPO resets the output of the valve without resetting of the command memory VKS. The valve remains activated and the output is automatically set again with 1Signal at this interface. To stop the valve completely 1-Signal at VBFA or 0-Signal at VBVG is required. If the valve is stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group. This interface does not work in local mode.
VLOC
Local mode release
A 1-signal at this interface releases the valve for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the valve can be opened/closed via inputs VOP and VCL. The operation mode is changed by the associated group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting interface VLOC with signal GLO of the associated group. In local mode operation via the PLC only protection interlock VSVG is effective. The status of interfaces VEVG and VBVG is not analysed in local mode.
5-5
Valve
VEIZ
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the valve, i.e. the valve can be started and stopped individually from the central control room. The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface VEIZ with signal GES of the associated group. In single-start mode all interlocks of the valve are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
VSTB
Stand-by mode
In the philosophy of CEMAT-Standards only the active plant sections can generate alarm messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty this is indicated in the symbol at the flow mimic but there will be no alarm message. A 1-Signal at interface VSTB means that the valve is in stand-by mode. In this mode the valve is monitored for availability. If a fault occurs in stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
VKR1
No feedback contact 1
If the valve has only one limit switch for direction 2 (open) then interface VKR1 must be connected to 1-signal. LOG0 must be connected to VE1 limit position 1. With 1-Signal at VKR1 the valve moving away from limit position 2 is interpreted as limit position 1.
VMFR
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this, one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface of the appropriate modules. This causes no alarms to be generated. The cause of control voltage failure is generated by an annunciation module which has to be engineered for this purpose.
VMZS
A 1-signal on VMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the status call the valve fault can still be seen.
VLPZ
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using VLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
5-6
Valve
VQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and one wants to acknowledge separately one connects the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) to this interface. Caution: Using VQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
VBFE
Command ON
Interface to start the valve in automatic mode. With 1-signal the valve is started. The interface is normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the associated route(s). The start is initiated either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process values). Caution: Interface VBFE should not be connected with a continuous signal as a valve fault can then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required one must take care that the VBFE has signal zero in case of a fault.
VBFA
Command OFF
Interface to switch off the valve in automatic mode. With 1-signal the valve is switched off. The interface is normally connected through the negated GDE signal of the associated group(s) or through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s). The switch off is either immediately or delayed according to the set stop delay time (process values).
QSTP
Quick stop
In some situations it may be necessary to stop the drives of a group instantaneously (without stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate deenergizing of the valve in automatic mode (interface VBFA may have a delaying effect). The group module sets during quick stop the signal GQS. Interface QSTP of the drives must be connected with this signal.
DSIG_BQ
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the valve.
5-7
Valve
STAT_SC Format BYTE
Status SIMOCODE
Default: 0
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter of the adapter block "C_SIMO_A". Additional one has to enable this function with 1-signal at parameter "REL_SC".
STA2_B10
5-8
Valve
Releases
NSTP_L_A No stop after switching local auto Basic state 0-signal
This parameter is foreseen for different project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled.
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
With 0-signal at this parameter the local-stop is not effective in automatic mode. 1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too and an alarm will be created.
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
Links
The fault of the valve is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every valve must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the valve must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the valve belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the valve belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the valve. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
5-9
Valve
Valve1 V_VALVE MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
5-10
Valve
Process values
RTMONTIM
Run-time monitoring
Default: 5
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. The valve module checks whether the required limit position has been reached within the set time. If the time is exceeded the valve module signals a run time fault. This time must be adjusted according to the true valve run time. The set time is valid for both directions (open and close).
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. In automatic mode the triggering of the valve is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In single-start mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 9999) Value in seconds. The stopping of the valve via interface VBFA is delayed by the set time.
HORN_TIM
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. When the valve is triggered in single-start mode a horn bit (module output) is set for the duration of the set time and the start of the valve is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to trigger a start-up warning.
5-11
Valve
Output interfaces
VVS1 Logic signal A 1-signal means Valve in limit position 1. The logic signal is mainly used for interlocking with other drives and as a feedback for the route or the group.
VVS2
Logic signal
A 1-signal means "Valve in limit position 2. The logic signal is mainly used for interlocking with other drives and as a feedback for the route or the group.
VST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs during the triggering of the valve or in stand-by mode the dynamic fault bit is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged. Caution: In following cases the valve fault cannot be acknowledged. - If the ON command is constantly present; - if the valve is not in limit position 1 (corresponds to welded contactor in E-module)
SST
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set for a given time period during the starting of the valve in single-start mode and can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
VVSP
Logic signal for sporadic valves
A 1-signal means valve has received a command to open in automatic mode or in single start mode (Command Memory is ON). The valve is opened when the interface VSPO has 1-Signal. The VVSP-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON of the valve can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver block in order to switch all driver blocks to simulation mode.
5-12
Valve
Hardware outputs
VBE Command ON The VBE signal is used to trigger the valve.
VL1
Position/fault lamp
The position/fault lamp VL1 indicates the status of the valve and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the valve is fault-free and has reached the limit position 1 (closed). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
VL2
Position/fault lamp
The position/fault lamp VL2 indicates the status of the valve and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the valve is fault-free and has reached the limit position 2 (open). Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged).
5-13
Valve
Interfaces to OS
TEST_OSS Test interface The test interfaces are used for module development and must not be changed!
Message ID
Command word
Reset time Number of movements for OS
Number of movements for OS
RT_H Interface to MIS
Number of movements refresh. Every hour
Status word 1
Status word 2
5-14
Valve
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "true" annunciations. An annunciation release for each object means that the communication and OS are not overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure.
5-15
Valve
Module states
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Status / Text Display

limit position 1 moving to position 1 limit position 2 moving to position 2 fault not acknowledged fault acknowledged local mode position 1 local mode moving to position 1 local mode position 2 local mode moving to position 2 single mode position 1 single mode moving to position 1 single mode position 2 single mode moving to position 2
Symbol Display
Gray Blinking gray Green Blinking green Blinking red Red Yellow Blinking yellow Yellow Blinking yellow Blue Blinking blue Blue Blinking blue
Text Presentation
Black, white Black, white Black, green Black, green White, red White, red Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, blue Black, blue Black, blue Black, blue
See also OS variables table
Commands
5-16
Valve
I/O-bar of C_VALVE
C_VALVE
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U Permitted Values
Element VE1 VE2 VSB VVO VCL VOP VEVG VBVG VSVG VSPO VLOC VEIZ VSTB VKR1 VMFR VMZS VLPZ VQIT VBFE VBFA QSTP DSIG_BQ STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12
Meaning Limit position 1 Limit position 2 Electrical readiness Local switch Local direction 1 Local direction 2 Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock Sporadic on/off Local mode release Single-start mode release Stand-by mode No feedback contact 1 Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Command ON Command OFF Quick stop Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2
Default 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Attr.
HMI
5-17
Valve Element STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 NSTP_L_A LST_ACT REL_SC STAT_SC TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND RTMONTIM STARTDEL STOPDEL HORN_TIM GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE INT Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B#16#0 0 Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Attr. U U U U U U U U U U U U + + + + + HMI Permitted Values
Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 No stop after switchover local auto Local stop active in automatic mode Enable SIMOCODE Status SIMOCODE Must not be changed Message ID Command word Run-time monitoring Start delay Stop delay Horn time for single start Associated group/route Associated group/route For several routes/groups
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT INT INT INT W#16#0 10 0 0 10 0 0 0
RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H
DWORD DW#16#0
IO IO IO
U U U
+ + +
Number of movements for OS DWORD DW#16#0 Number of movements for OS DWORD DW#16#0 refreshed every hour
INTFC_OS VISU_OS STATUS
Interface status for OS Status for symbol display Status word 1
DWORD DW#16#0 BYTE DWORD B#16#0 W#16#0
O O O
U U U
+ + +
5-18
Reference Manual Objects Element STATUS2 ALARM VVS1 VVS2 VST SST HORN VVSP SIM_ON VBE VL1 VL2 Meaning Status word 2 Alarm word for test Logic signal 1 Logic signal 2 Dynamic fault Group fault Start-up horn Logic signal sporadic valve Simulation on (Driver) Command ON Position/fault lamp Position/fault lamp Format DWORD Default W#16#0 Typ e O O O O O O O O O O O O U U Attr. U U HMI +
Valve Permitted Values
DWORD DW#16#0 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5-19
Valve
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
COMMAND
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 OFF ON R_RTOS
Commandword
0 AUS 1 EIN 2 Anzahl Operationen lschen 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
OFF ON Reset No of Operations OS
I/O
16Bit
5-20
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\05_V_e.doc
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
Valve
STATUS
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 LOC EIZ VVS1 VVS2 HORN VST VKS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status
Freigabe Vorort Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Endlage 1 Endlage 2 Strung nicht quittiert Kommandospeicher
Status
Local mode released Single start mode released Limit Position 1 Limit Position 2 Fault not acknowledged Command memory
S,O
Bitmap
16Bit
STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17
VSB VVO RMF VSV
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft 9 Strung Vorort 10 Strung Rckmeldung 11 Strung Schutzverriegelung 12 13 14 15 8 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Sequenz Test Sammelstrung Signal Strung Verknpfungssignal sporadisch Einschaltverzgerung Ausschaltverzgerung
Electrical fault Local switch fault Feedback fault Protection interlock fault
SQT SST BQU VVSP ON_DLY OFF_DLY
Sequence test general fault Bad Quality of signals Running Signal sporadic valve ON delay OFF delay
5-21
Valve
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 VE1 VE2 VSB VVO VCL VOP VBE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Endlage 1 Endlage 2 Schaltbereitschaft Vorortschalter Vorort Start Richtung 1 Vorort Start Richtung 2 Befehl Ein
Status
Limit Position 1 Limit Position 2 El. Healthy Local Switch Local Start Direction 1 Local Start Direction 2 Command ON / OFF
S,O
16Bit
verbunden mit Parameter verbunden mit Parameter verbunden mit Parameter
verbunden mit Parameter
connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter connected to parameter
5-22
Valve
VISU_OS
dezimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Zustand fr Symbol und Texte Endlage 1 Fhrt Richtung 1 Endlage 2 Fhrt Richtung 2 Strung nicht QT Strung QT Vorort Endlage 1 Vorort fhrt Richtung 1 Vorort Endlage 2 Vorort fhrt Richtung 2 Einzelbetrieb Endlage 1 Einzelbetrieb fhrt Richtung 1 Einzelbetrieb Endlage 2 Einzelbetrieb fhrt Richtung 2
Status for Symbol and Text limit position 1 moving to position 1 limit position 2 moving to position 2 fault not acknowledged fault acknowledged local mode position 1 local mode moving to position 1 local mode position 2 local mode moving to position 2 single mode position 1 single mode moving to position 1 single mode position 2 single mode moving to position 2
S,O
Byte
5-23
Valve
ALARM
ALA_VSB ALA_VVO ALA_RMF ALA_LST ALA_B24 ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_REP SIG1 SIG2 SIG3 SIG4 SIG5 SIG6 SIG7 SIG8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung Vorort Strung Rckmeldung Vorort Stop
Alarm
Electrical fault Local switch fault Feedback fault local stop ALF ALF ALF ALF E S M S VSB VVO RMF LST
Strung noch vorhanden Laufzeitberwachung Einschaltverzgerung Hupzeit fr Einzelstart Ausschaltverzgerung Resetzeit Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS Anzahl Bewegungen fr OS akt. Je Stunde
Still Faulty Run time supervision start delay time for start up warning stop delay Reset time for No. Of operations for OS No. of operations for OS No. of operations for OS refreshed every h D D D D D D D xxx xxx xxx xxxx Datum /Uhr xxxxxx xxxxx h sec. sec. sec. sec. I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O DWord Dword 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-9999
ALF OM OM OM OM
REP RTMONTIM STARTDEL HORN_TIM STOPDEL
RTMONTIM STARTDEL HORN_TIM STOPDEL RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H
5-24
Valve
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 VEVG VBVG VSVG 3 VSPO 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2
Nahtstellenwort
Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Schutzverriegelung
Interfaceword
Start interlock Operating interlock Protection interlock
Bit
32Bit
Sporadisch Ein/Aus
Sporadic ON/OFF
VLOC VEIZ VSTB
Vorortbetrieb Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Freigabe Betriebsart Stand-by
Local mode release Single start mode release Stand-by mode
VKR1
Kein Rckmeldekontakt 1
no feedback contact 1
VMFR VMZS
VLPZ VQIT
16 17 Meldefreigabe 18 Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe 19 20 21 22 23 Lampen prfen (Zusatz) 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Quittieren (Zusatz)
Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional)
VBFE VBFA QSTP
Befehl Ein Befehl Aus Schnellstop
Command ON Command OFF Quick stop
5-25
Valve
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Ausgabe: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\05_V_e.doc
5-27
Annunciation Module
6 Annunciation Module
6 ANNUNCIATION MODULE
Description of C_ANNUNC Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_ANNUNC OS variables table
1
2 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 13
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\06_M_e.doc
6-1
Annunciation Module
Description of C_ANNUNC
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_ANNUNC FB1004
Calling OBs
C_ANNUNC must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
With annunciation modules a signal can be displayed on the screen as an alarm message. There are two basic applications for annunciation modules.
Drive faults Annunciation of drive faults which cannot be signaled by the drive itself. These are the signals which are connected to the protection interlock (e.g. belt drift, pull-rope, bearing temperature etc.).
Process signal annunciations (interlocks) Annunciation of process signals such as silo levels and other interlocks.
6-2
Annunciation Module
Operating principle
Input interfaces
MST0 Input Signal Basic state 0-signal When this interface changes its state unequal to OKS an alarm is generated. If a time delay is set for response, then the output signal MAU and the alarm are delayed by this time. If a time delay is set for dropout, then the output signal and the outgoing message are delayed by this time. OKS Signal status for OK 0 0 1 1 MST0 Input signal 0 1 1 0 Alarm no yes no yes MAU Output signal 0 1 1 0
OKS
OK-Signal
Signal status for OK, look at the table above
MSIG
Process Signal
With this interface the annunciation block is able to show additionally to the fault also the actual status of the process signal. 1-Signal at interface MSIG and no fault switches the OS Symbol to green color. Typical Application: Pressure switches. The inverted signal oil pressure ok together with the delayed running signal of the motor (EVS) is connected to MST0. The oil pressure signal itself is directly connected to MSIG. Display at the OS Symbol no fault, no pressure white no fault, pressure ok green unacknowledged fault red blinking acknowledged fault red
MAMV
Alarm interlock
If a 0-signal is connected to this interface, the alarm, the horn and the blinking at the group fault lamp are suppressed. In this case the group fault lamp indicates continuous red. When making a status call this fault is indicated there. Typical application: If under stand still conditions of a group an affiliated annunciation module should not generate an alarm, one can connect MAMV with GRE. If there is a fault it is indicated by a continuous red at the group fault lamp. With the status call one can look for the cause. As soon as the group is started the alarms become active.
6-3
Annunciation Module
MAAT
Alarm activation
The protection interlock (ESV, KSV, VSV) is not annunciated by the respective drive module. For each signal (e.g. pull-rope, belt drift etc.) one has to program an annunciation module which annunciates these events. While starting a drive with a fault present (and already annunciated), the M-module would not generate a new alarm message. A new alarm is triggered if EST (VST, KST) is connected to the interface MAAT.
MMFR
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Caution: Module output MAU and thus the signal for interlocking is still effective. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To avoid this, one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface. This results in no alarm being produced. An annunciation module must be configured to report the control voltage failure cause.
MMZS
A 1-signal on MMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. The GBE is not effected by this fault when the group is started. If one does not want to indicate a fault with the annunciation module but an interlock, then MMZS must be connected with a 1-signal. The alarm in the annunciation line appears like a fault but then indicates the interlock.
MLPZ
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using MLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
MQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, then one has to connect the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) to this interface. Caution: Using MQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
QUALITY Format Byte
Quality Code of the driver
Basic state 99
If Driver blocks are used, the output QUALITY of the driver block must be connected to Interface QUALITY of the annunciation block. In the default state Quality Code = 99 the annunciation block knows that no driver block exists.
6-4
Annunciation Module
Releases
REL_SIM_ON Simulation On Basic state 0-Signal The enable for simulation can be switched on/off only from Diagnostic Picture. When using drivers the output SIM_ON of the annunciation block has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. Caution: REL_SIM_ON is no block parameter
Links
The fault of the annunciation module is represented as a group signal in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every annunciation module must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the annunciation module must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the annunciation module belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the annunciation module belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the annunciation module. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
6-5
Annunciation Module
Meldung 1 C_ANNUNC MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the annunciation module. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the annunciations, measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
6-6
Annunciation Module
Process values
IN_DEL
Signal delay on activation
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During signal change from 0 to 1 signal output MAU and the alarm message are delayed by the set time.
OUT_DEL
Signal delay on dropout
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During signal change from 1 to 0 the signal output MAU and the outgoing message are delayed by the set time.
REP_TIM
Annunciation repetition time
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 9999) Value in seconds. If a value is entered here and if MST0 has a 1-signal, a going message and then an alarm message is generated again after the time value has elapsed.
M_SIM
Simulation value of the driver
Default: 0
Format BOOL (0-1) If driver blocks are used, connect the output Q of the driver block to interface S_SIM. If simulation is switched on, the status of the simulation value will be displayed in the diagnostic picture. If you do not use drivers the given value from the parameter M_SIM is used as the input-signal in simulation mode.
6-7
Annunciation Module
Output interfaces
MAU Output signal Always use this signal for the interlocking so that possible time delays are made effective.
SIM_ON
Simulation EIN
If you use drivers this output has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. The simulation value is transmitted from the driver block via M_SIM.
Hardware outputs
MLA Annunciation lamp The MLA signal can be used to connect an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A flashing light indicates a dynamic annunciation (non-acknowledged) and a continuous light indicates a static annunciation (already acknowledged). A 0-signal indicates that no annunciation is present.
6-8
Annunciation Module
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Status word for test
ALARM Test interface
Alarm word for test
6-9
Annunciation Module
6-10
Annunciation Module
Module states
Variable STATUS: Status / Text Display
No fault, no signal No fault, signal available Fault not acknowledged Fault acknowledged
Icon Display
White Green Blinking red Red
Text Presentation
Black, white Black, white White, red White, red
See also OS variable table
Commands
Refer to the OS variable table for the assignment of the command word.
6-11
Annunciation Module
I/O-bar of C_ANNUNC
C_ANNUNC
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O U U U + + U U + + + U U Permitted Values
Element MST0 OKS MSIG MAMV MAAT MMFR MMZS MLPZ MQIT QUALITY M_SIM TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID IN_DEL OUT_DEL REP_TIM GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK STATUS ALARM MAU MLA SIM_ON
Meaning Signal input for fault OK-Signal Process Signal Alarm interlock Alarm activation Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Quality code; 99 = no driver Simulation value display on OS Must not be changed Message ID Signal delay on activation Signal delay on dropout Annunciation repetition time Associated group/route Associated group/route For several groups/routes Status word for test Alarm word for test Output signal Annunciation lamp Simulation on
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE BOOL INT
Default 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 99 0 0
Attr.
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0 INT INT INT INT INT INT 0 0 0 0 0 0
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD BOOL BOOL BOOL W#16#0 0 0 0
6-12
Annunciation Module
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 SOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
Simulation ON/OFF
Commandword
Simulation ON/OFF
Bit
I/O
16Bit
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
6-13
Annunciation Module
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 FAULT NQT MSIG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Status
Strung quittiert Strung nicht quittiert Prozess Signal = 1
Status
Fault acknowledged Fault not acknowledged Process Signal = 1
S,O
Bitmap
16Bit
MAU
Ausgangssignal
Outputsignal
DRV LVV SUB SON SIV MST0 MSIG MAMV MAAT MMFR MMZS MLPZ MQIT OKS
Verbunden mit Treiber Letzter gltiger Wert Ersatzwert Simulation ON Simulationswert Strung Prozesignal Alarmverriegelung Alarmaktivierung Meldefreigabe Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe Lampen prfen (Zusatz) Quittieren (Zusatz)
Connected to a driver Last valid value Substitution value Simulation ON Simulation value Fault Process Signal Alarm interlock Alarm activation Annunciation release Fault interlock to group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) OK-signal
24 OK-Signalzustand 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
6-14
Annunciation Module
AlarmWord
ALA_MS0 ALA_B21 ALA_B22 ALA_B23 ALA_B24 ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_REP ALA_B10 ALA_B11 ALA_B12 ALA_B13 ALA_B14 ALA_B15 ALA_B16 ALA_B17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Alarm
Strung
Alarm
Fault
16Bit PM Anw. Anw.
Strung noch vorhanden
Still faulty
PM
IN_DEL OUT_DEL REP_TIM
Signalverzgerung bei Ansprechen Delay for incoming faults Signalverzgerung bei Abfallen Delay after dropout Meldewiederholzeit Annunciation repeat time
D D D
xxxx xxxx xxxx
sec. sec. sec.
I/O I/O I/O
0-999 OM 0-999 OM 0-9999 OM
IN_DEL OUT_DEL REP_TIM
6-15
Annunciation Module
6-17
Measured Value
7 Measured Value
7 MEASURED VALUE
Description of C_MEASUR Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware / measuring channel inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_MEASUR OS variables table
1
2 2 2 2 9 9 10 13 14 15 16 20 23 24 24 25 25 26 30
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\07_Um_e.doc
7-1
Measured Value
Description of C_MEASUR
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_MEASUR FB1006
Calling OBs
C_MEASUR must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The measured value module can be used to read and condition analog values from S7 peripheral cards or to feed existing physical values (e.g. from recipes or a simulation). The following functions are performed: An analogue value from the S7 peripheral card, or a physical value in REAL format can be read and monitored. Using driver block CH_AI, certain connections between driver block and measuring value block are required. ATTENTION: Using drivers no live zero monitoring is done. One can use the binary signal QBAD from the driver block. If no driver block is used: validation check of the read analogue value (QVZ, rated range, overflow -> live zero) The module live zero output is set to the 1-signal for an invalid measured value. A measured value is invalid if the module does not exist (QVZ), or when the read measured value has overshot or undershot (7FFF or 8000 hexadecimal). The analogue value can be monitored at 8 limits. For 4 limits an alarm can be generated. All limit value violations are available as module outputs for the user program. A smoothing function can be enabled. A gradient monitoring can be enabled. If the parameterisable gradient values are exceeded, the corresponding module outputs for the user program are set to the 1-signal. One can switch the measuring-block to the simulation mode, in this case the simulation value is taken. During sequence-test mode all measure blocks are switched to the simulation mode. The simulation value can be modified from the faceplate. Through bypass-function the measuring value can be blocked. There are 2 solutions of the bypass-function. If the measuring value is bypassed, it can not be switched into simulation mode.
7-2
Measured Value
Connection between Driver block CH_AI and C_MEASUR To enable the selection and parameterization of substitution value and simulation value from the Operator Station the Driver block CH_AI has to be connected to the Measuring value in the following way: The settings for scale beginning and scale end (SCB and SCE) can either be carried out at the driver block or at C_MEASUR. In the following example the settings at the C_MEASUR are used and transferred via SCB_OUT and SCE_OUT to the driver block. Caution: For PT100 this connection has to be removed. The selection of substitution value / last valid value for the driver block takes place via SUBS_ON. The substitution value is transferred via SUBS_V_O to the driver block.
7-3
Measured Value
ATTENTION:
When configuring a PT100 in the CFC on the "CH_AI" block you must specify the value 0 for the parameters "VHRANGE" and "VLRANGE".
7-4
Measured Value
Limit value monitoring / spike suppression / hysteresis FB-UM monitors the measured value for the overshoot and undershoot of 8 limit values. In the following picture only 4 limits are shown: HH H L LL Upper limit 2 Upper limit 1 Lower limit 1 Lower limit 2
As soon as there is an overshoot of an upper limit or an undershoot of a lower limit, an alarm message is generated. The message can be released or blocked separately for each limit value. The response to a limit value violation can take place after a time delay. This is useful to permit the suppression of transient spikes. The time delay can be set from the OS.
LZ
O2
O1
TV2
TV2
ZW2:GO1
ZW2:GO2
TV2
Bausteinausgnge:
UO1
UO2
Time progression during the spike suppression: Only after the Tv2 time delay has elapsed, is the overshoot or undershoot of a limit value signalled and the module output set to the 1-signal. The delay applies to every limit value (HH, H, L, LL).
7-5
Measured Value
To avoid constant coming and going of a limit value alarm message - if, e.g. the measured value "varies" around a limit value - one can enter a hysteresis value from the OS. In this case, a GEHT (GOING) signal is generated only when the measured value is < upper limit - hysteresis or measured value is > lower limit + hysteresis
LZ
O2
O2 - HYS
O1
TV2
O1 - HYS
ZW2:GO1
ZW2:GO2
TV2
Module outputs:
UO1
UO2
Time progression during spike suppression with hysteresis being taken into consideration: In this diagram you can see that the delay time for the spike suppression is not re-triggered in every case. The delay starts in the example after an overshoot of UL1. In the example, UL2 is also exceeded shortly after UL1 but TV2 continues to run (no reset!). At the end of TV2 , UL1 and UL2 are signalled simultaneously.
7-6
Measured Value
Arithmetic Operations For further processing and conditioning each measured value can be "further processed" through an arithmetic operation. The following arithmetic operations are possible:
XE * XE s q a r in g SK E - SKA
r o o t e x t r a c ti o n
X E * (S K E - S K A )
Smoothing For each measured value you can set and release a smoothing according to the trapezoidal formula:
XE XA = TA 2 * TG X
EA
* +1
TA 2 * TG
XE + XEA X EA = TA 2 * TG
EA
* +1
TA T
G
+ XEA
TA = 1s is set as standard as the invocation time. This results - without taking the physical unit [s] into account - in the following simplified formulas:
XE XA = 1 2 * TG XE XA = 1+ 2 * TG X 1 * +1 2 * TG + X EA X EA = XE 1 2 * TG XE + XEA X EA = 1 2 + T
G
EA
EA
1 * TG
+ X EA
+1
X EA
X EA + X EA
2 * ( XE X EA = 1+
EA
) + XEA
2 * TG
XE XA XEA TG TA
= = = = =
New analog value Smoothed analog value (result) Old value for smoothing Smoothing time Invocation time (here always set to 1s)
With the smoothing time one can determine the degree of smoothing.
7-7
Measured Value
Gradient monitoring Changes of the measured value can be monitored separately, i.e. in the positive as well as in the negative direction (positive/negative gradient). When the monitoring is released one module output is set to a 1 signal in each case if the maximum permitted positive or negative derivativeaction coefficient is exceeded. The monitoring can be delayed by setting a time in the OS. The gradient monitoring does not generate any alarms, an alarm message line does not appear on the OS. Should, however, this function be requested, then an annunciation module must be programmed for this.
Time progression with the gradient monitoring:

E x a m p le : p o s . d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t > 1 % n e g . d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t < 1 % A n n u n c ia tio n s u p p re s s io n tim e : -> 1 s tim e b a s e -> 5 s tim e b a s e T M 3 s = T h e tim e b a s e is d e te rm in e d b y th e F B -U M its e lf: d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t > 1 % (= K F = + 4 0 ) -> 1 s d e riv .-a c tio n c o e ffic ie n t < 1 % -> 5 s <
M e a s u re d v a lu e
Z W 2 -U M : UGP UGN TM M o d u le o u tp u ts : UGP UGN TM
1s
5s
1s
p o s . g ra d ie n t
n e g . g ra d ie n t
p o s . g ra d ie n t
In this diagram you can see that the detection and changeover of "positive gradient" to "negative gradient" and vice-versa happens only after the access to the measured value. This means, changes between two access points are not detected immediately. The newly read measured value is always compared with the measured value read during the last access. In this context, the term "measured value" refers to a read-in analog value which has been, smoothed and calculated, depending on the release functions. If the new measured value is greater than or equal to the last read-in measured value the gradient is positive and the difference is compared with the set "positive derivative-action coefficient". If the difference is greater than the set value, then the module output UGP is set after the delay has elapsed. The same applies to the negative gradient. The variables "positive/negative derivative-action coefficient", necessary for the gradient monitoring, must each be entered with a positive sign!
7-8
Measured Value
Operating principle
Hardware / measuring channel inputs
TYP Type of the imported value Default: 77 Format INTEGER The type decides whether the measured value is read from the S7 peripheral card or is provided as a physical value in REAL format. TYPE 10: Import the measured value as REAL number The physical value is passed as MV_PHYS parameter. It is also possible to pass the quality code for the use of driver modules (QUALITY parameter). TYPE 77: Import the measured value from the S7 peripheral card The MV_CARD parameter must be interconnected with the analog input. The CARD_SCB and CARD_SCE parameters are used to define the scale beginning and scale end of the card.
MV_PHYS Format REAL
Input for physical values
The MV_PHYS parameter is used to read a measured value as a physical value. The MV_PHYS parameter is read only when the measured value type = 10.
QUALITY Format BYTE
The quality code when driver modules are used
Pass the quality code to the measured value when driver modules are used.
MV_CARD Format WORD
Direct input from the card
The MV_CARD parameter is used to import a measured value directly from the card. The MV_CARD parameter is read only when the measured value type = 77.
CARD_SCB
Beginning value of the card
Default:0
Format INTEGER This is the beginning value for the rated range of the analog input card.
CARD_SCE
End value of the card
Default: 27648
Format INTEGER This is the end value for the rated range of the analog input card.
7-9
Measured Value
Input interfaces
RA_HH Release of fault message Upper limit 2 Basic state 1-signal If a 0-signal is applied at this interface, no alarm message is generated, no summarizing fault indication for group and route, and no color change to the digital display at the control. Application: If these limits are to be used as a switching limit.
RA_H See RA_HH
Release of fault message Upper limit 1
RA_L See RA_HH
Release of fault message Lower limit 1
RA_LL See RA_HH
Release of fault message Lower limit 2
7-10
Measured Value
BYPB_ACT
Bypass-button active
With 1-signal at this parameter the button "BYPASS" in the diagnosis faceplate is displayed. With this button one can activate and deactivate the bypass-function. ATTENTION: If BYPB_ACT is set to 1-Signal the mode of action for interface UGWA is different. The function is known as "SERVICE" too.
UGWA
block measuring channel / bypass
The way of working is depending from parameter BYPB_ACT.
if BYPB_ACT = 0 and with 1-signal at UGWA : - the analogue value is no longer read - the module flag USP has 1-signal - monitoring for limit value and gradient, computation, smoothing, etc. are switched off - the limit value bits are no longer updated - no alarm message generated! Typical case of application is the gas analysis: During the gas analysis the measuring probe must be cleaned after certain intervals. For this the measuring probe is retracted from the kiln. In order not to have faulty measuring the measuring channel is blocked during the phase of cleaning. For this, a corresponding signal must be connected to interface UGWA.
if BYPB_ACT = 1 (SERVICE) and with 1-signal at UGWA : - the analogue value is still read and displayed - the module flag USP has 1-signal, all the other module flags are forced to 0-signal - monitoring for limit values and gradient, computation, smoothing, etc. are switched off - no alarm message generated! Note: One can switch on the bypass-function from the diagnose faceplate too.
USCB
Measured value output at scale beginning
If a 1-signal is applied to this interface, then the value of the scale beginning is available at output MV. This function can be used if, for example, a motor current is measured, and the measurement still shows a low value although the motor is switched off.
UGWB
Release limit value calculation
If this interface is connected with 0-signal, the limit value monitoring is blocked. The Measuring value module monitors and signals then only live-zero.
7-11
Measured Value
UAMV
Alarm interlock
No alarm message is generated at this interface for a 0-signal. The group fault lamp lights continually red if a fault has occurred. The status call can be used to query the fault cause. Typical application: If, for example, a measured value module is not to produce any alarm when the group is stationary, log '0' is applied to the UAMV. If the group is stationary, this fault is displayed as GZS (red continuous light). UAMV can, for example, be connected with GRE; i.e. the alarms are activated as soon as the group starts to run.
UMFR
No alarm messages are created and no group displays are triggered for group and route for a 0signal at this interface. This interface must be connected to avoid producing incorrect signals. Example: If the control voltage fails for MCC or field signals, every sensor signal would initiate an alarm message (surge of messages). To avoid this, one should connect the 'control voltage' signal to the UMFR interface. This results in no alarm being produced if the control voltage fails. An annunciation module must be configured to report the "control voltage failure" cause.
UMZS
A 1-signal on UMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the status call the drive fault can still be seen.
UQIT
Used with the control desk technology. If one has several independent control desks that are to be individually acknowledged, the appropriate acknowledge signal (pulse) can be connected to this interface. Caution: Using UQIT the acknowledgment interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
STA2_B10
7-12
Measured Value
Releases
REL_SQAR Release squaring Basic state 0-signal A 1-signal at the REL_SQAR interface releases the Squaring function.
REL_ROOT
Release root extraction
A 1-signal at the REL_ROOT interface releases the root extraction function.
REL_SMOO
Release smoothing
A 1-signal at the REL_SMOO interface releases the smoothing. The parameter SMOO_TIM is used to set the process value for the smoothing time.
REL_GRAD
Release gradient monitoring
A 1-signal at the REL_GRAD interface releases the gradient monitoring. The parameters GRAD_POS, GRAD_NEG and GRAD_TIM are used to set the process values of the gradient monitoring.
REL_SPIK
Release spike suppression
A 1-signal at the REL_SPIK interface releases the spike suppression. The parameter SPIK_TIM is used to set the process value of the spike suppression time.
REL_SUBS
Release Substitution value
With 1-signal at REL_SUBS the substitution value of a driver block is enabled. In case of a hardware-failure the substitution value is used as measured value. With 0-signal at REL_SUBS in case of a hardware-failure the last valid value is used.
REL_SIM
Simulation-function
One can switch on/off the simulation from the diagnosis faceplate of the OS. When switching into sequence test mode all C_MEASURE are automatically switched to simulation. If the Simulation is activated the value at Parameter SIM_VAL is used as input value. This function has the highest priority. The similar simulation function of an eventually used driver block is not taken care because in order to enable the simulation also without driver block. Caution: Simulation-function has the highest priority, which means it is active independent of the quality code of the measure (except if Bypass function is enabled). The REL_SIM is no parameter at the block.
7-13
Measured Value
Links
The fault of the measured value is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/ route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every measured value must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the measured value must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the measured value belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the measured value belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the measured value. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
7-14
Measured Value
Mewert1 C_MEASUR MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the measured value. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the annunciations, measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
7-15
Measured Value
Process values
VAL_HH Format REAL.
Upper limit 2
Default: 100.0
This is the value of upper limit 2. If this limit value is overshot, then the module generates an alarm message and sets module output HH.
VAL_H Format REAL.
Upper limit 1
Default: 100-0
This is the value of upper limit 1. If this limit value is overshot, then the module generates an alarm message and sets module output H. If the measure is connected to the drive block in order to display the motor current in the drive faceplate, upper limit 1 corresponds to 100% of the current value.
VAL_L Format REAL.
Lower limit 1
Default: 0.0
This is the value of the lower limit 1. If this limit value is undershot, then the module generates an alarm message and sets module output L.
VAL_LL Format REAL.
Lower limit 2
Default: 0.0
This is the value of lower limit 2. If this limit value is undershot, then the module generates an alarm message and sets module output LL.
LZ_TIM
Delay Live Zero
Default: 3
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. When a live-zero fault occurs, the corresponding alarm message and the module output ULZ is delayed by the set time value. TV = 0s means: no delay
7-16
Measured Value
SPIK_TIM
Spike suppression time
Default: 3
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. If the spike suppression is released (release functions), then, with the occurrence of a limit violation, the corresponding annunciation is delayed by the set time value.
HYSTERES
Hysteresis
Default: 0.0
Format REAL (0.0 - 9.9) Value in %. This contains the hysteresis value. If a limit value is undershot or overshot (value < Lower limit 1/2 or value > Upper limit 1/2), a fault is reported if the appropriate connection is available. This fault is corrected only when the limit value (including hysteresis) is once again overshot or undershot (value > Lower limit 1/2 + hysteresis, or value < Upper limit 1/2 - hysteresis).
GRAD_POS
Gradient positive
Default: 0.0
Format REAL (0.0 - 99.9) Value in %. If the gradient monitoring has been released (release functions), the measured value will be monitored to ensure that an increase of the measured value (positive gradient y) does not exceed the value specified here. However, the UGP module output is set if y is larger than the positive gradient specified here.
GRAD_NEG
Gradient negative
Default: 0.0
Format REAL (0.0- 99.9) Value in %. If the gradient monitoring has been released (release functions), the measured value will be monitored to ensure that a decrease of the measured value (negative gradient y) does not exceed the value specified here. However, the UGN module output is set if y is larger than the negative gradient specified here.
GRAD_TIM
Gradient delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. If the gradient monitoring is released (release functions), then, with the occurrence of a positive or negative gradient overshoot, the corresponding module output (UGN/UGP) is delayed by the set time value.
7-17
Measured Value
SMOO_TIM
Smoothing time
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. If the smoothing is released (release functions), then the smoothing time, set here, is the degree of smoothing. The longer the smoothing time the stronger the smoothing. TG = 0s means: no smoothing Variable "invocation time TA, appearing in the trapezoidal formula, is set in the standard with TA = 1s.
VAL_SHH Format REAL
Upper switching limit 2
Default: 100.0
This is the value of the upper switching limit 2. If this limit value is overshot, then the module sets module output SHH.
VAL_SH Format REAL
Upper switching limit 1
Default: 100.0
This is the value of the upper switching limit 1. If this limit value is overshot, then the module sets module output SH.
VAL_SL Format REAL
Lower switching limit 1
Default: 0.0
This is the value of the lower switching limit 1. If this limit value is undershot, then the module sets module output SL.
VAL_SLL Format REAL
Lower switching limit 2
Default: 0.0
This is the value of the lower switching limit 2. If this limit value is undershot, then the module sets module output SLL.
SUBS_VAL Format REAL
Substitution value
Default: 0.0
Therefore one has to connected the output SUBS_V_O of the C_MEASUR with the parameter SUBS_V of the driver block.
SIM_VAL Format REAL
Simulation value from OS
Default: 0.0
The simulation value can be entered from the Operating System.
7-18
Measured Value
SCB Format REAL
Scale beginning
Default: 0.0
Physical value (start of measuring range).
SCE Format REAL
Scale end
Default: 100.0
Physical value (end of measuring range).
UNIT
Unit
Default: %
Format STRING (8 characters) Unit of the measured value.
7-19
Measured Value
Output interfaces
MV Format REAL Output of the physical measured value. Measured value
QC Format BYTE
Quality code
Output of the measured value quality code when driver modules are used.
SCB_OUT Format REAL
Scale beginning
Physical value (start of measuring range).
SCE_OUT Format REAL
Scale end
Physical value (end of measuring range).
SUBS_V_O Format REAL
Substitute value (to driver)
If driver block CH_AI is used, this parameter can be connected to parameter SUBS_V of the driver block. This enables to enter the substitute value from the Operating System.
MV_PERC
Measured value in %
Format INTEGER The percentage value of the motor current can be displayed in the faceplate of the motor. Therefore the output MV_PERC of the C_MEASUR has to be connected to interface MV_PERC of the motor. The 100 % Output value is equal to Upper limit 1.
HH Format BOOL
Upper limit 2
If the measured value overshoots the upper limit 2, the HH bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
H Format BOOL
Upper limit 1
If the measured value overshoots the upper limit 1, the H bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
7-20
Measured Value
L Format BOOL
Lower limit 1
If the measured value undershoots the lower limit 1, the L bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
LL Format BOOL
Lower limit 2
If the measured value undershoots the lower limit 2, the LL bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
ULZ Format BOOL
Live Zero
If QVZ is detected during reading of the analog value or if the peripheral card indicates overshoot/undershoot, then the measured value is interpreted as being faulty and bit ULZ is set after the end of the live-zero delay time.
UST Format BOOL
Fault not acknowledged
UST=1 when the limits will be undershoot / overshoot an due to that an alarm or a warning is generated. UST=0 after the acknowledge button has been pressed.
UGN Format BOOL
Negative Gradient Overshot
If the permitted negative gradient is overshot during the reduction of the measured value, then "negative gradient has been overshot", the UGN bit is set when the delay expires.
UGP Format BOOL
Positive Gradient Overshot
If the permitted positive gradient is overshot during the increase of the measured value, then "positive gradient has been overshot", the UGP bit is set when the delay expires.
USP Format BOOL
Measuring channel blocked / bypassed
The measuring channel is blocked if interface bit UWFR has 0-signal. In this case bit USP is set to 1-signal.
7-21
Measured Value
SHH Format BOOL
Upper Switching Limit 2
If the measured value overshoots the upper switching limit 2, the SHH bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
SH Format BOOL
Upper Switching Limit 1
If the measured value overshoots the upper switching limit 1, the SH bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
SL Format BOOL
Lower Switching Limit 1
If the measured value undershoots the lower switching limit 1, the SL bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
SLL Format BOOL
Lower Switching Limit 2
If the measured value undershoots the lower switching limit 2, the SLL bit is set when the spike suppression time has expired.
SUBS_ON Format BOOL
Substitution value active (driver)
Using driver block CH_AI this signal can be connected to input SUBS_ON of the driver block. This allows the selection from the Operator station whether in case of a failure the substitution value SUBS_VAL or the last valid value is used as measuring value. Refer to Release function REL_SUBS.
SIM_ON Format BOOL
Simulation value active
Indicates that the input value is taken from parameter SIM_VAL Refer to Release function REL_SIM.
7-22
Measured Value
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Command word
Status word for OS
Status word 2 for OS
VSTATUS Interface to OS
Status word for Display
Alarm word for test
7-23
Measured Value
The module uses the ALARM_8P module to generate annunciations. A plausibility and priority logic at the process level analyses all object faults only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically the fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely. The current operational state of the plant objects is automatically taken into consideration during the fault analysis, e.g. all fault annunciations are suppressed automatically for a stationary group no superfluous fault annunciations are created the operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations. Each fault annunciation is also classified. This shows whether an electrical or a mechanical fault, a process fault or a shut-down with a local safety switch applies. An electrician does not always need to be called first The production operator can give specific instructions.
7-24
Measured Value
Module states
Variable STATUS: Digital display Status / Text Display
Measured value OK Measured value > UL2 Measured value > UL1 Measured value < LL1 Measured value < LL2 Measured value faulty (LZ) Gradient overshot Measuring channel blocked
Icon Display
black, gray white, red black, yellow black, yellow white, red yellow , black white , violet white ,blue
Bar display Status

Measured value OK Measured value > UL2 Measured value > UL1 Measured value < LL1 Measured value < LL2 Measured value faulty (LZ) Gradient overshot Measuring channel blocked
Display
green red yellow yellow red black green green
Commands
7-25
Measured Value
I/O-bar of C_MEASUR
C_MEASUR
Permitted Values
Element RA_HH RA_H RA_L RA_LL UGWA USCB UGWB UAMV UMFR UMZS UQIT STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 REL_SQAR REL_ROOT REL_SMOO REL_GRAD REL_SPIK REL_SUBS
Meaning Release fault message HH Release fault message H Release fault message L Release fault message LL Interlock measuring channel / measured value Measured value ouput at scale beginning Release limit value calculation Alarm interlock Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Acknowledge (additional) Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Release squaring Release root extraction Release smoothing Release gradient monitoring Release spike suppression Release substitution value
Default 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U
HMI
7-26
Reference Manual Objects Element BYPB_ACT TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND VAL_HH VAL_H VAL_L VAL_LL LZ_TIM SPIK_TIM HYSTERES GRAD_POS GRAD_NEG GRAD_TIM SMOO_TIM VAL_SHH VAL_SH VAL_SL VAL_SLL SUBS_VAL SIM_VAL SCB SCE UNIT TYP MV_PHYS QUALITY Meaning Bypass button active Must not be changed Message ID Command word Upper limit HH Upper limit H Lower limit L Lower limit LL Delay Live Zero Spike suppression time Hysteresis Gradient positive Gradient negative Gradient delay Smoothing time Upper switching limit HH Upper switching limit H Lower switching limit L Lower switching limit LL Substitute value from OS Simulation value from OS Scale beginning Scale end Unit Type of the imported value Input for physical values The quality code if drivers are used Format BOOL INT Default 0 0 Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U
Measured Value HMI Permitted Values
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD REAL REAL REAL REAL INT INT REAL REAL REAL INT INT REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL STRING [8] INT REAL BYTE W#16#0 0.000000e +002 0.000000e +002 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 3 3 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0 0 0.000000e +002 0.000000e +002 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +002 % 77 0.000000e +000 B#16#0
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
7-27
Measured Value Element MV_CARD CARD_SCB CARD_SCE GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK INTFC_OS MV QC SCB_OUT SCE_OUT SUBS_V_O MV_PERC STATUS STATUS2 VSTATUS ALARM HH H L LL ULZ UST UGN UGP USP SHH SH Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format WORD INT INT INT INT INT Default W#16#0 0 27648 0 0 0 Type Attr. I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U U U + + U + + HMI Permitted Values
Direct input from the card Beginning value of the card End value of the card Associated group/route Associated group/route For several groups/routes Interface status for OS Measured value Quality code Scale begin Scale end Substitute value (to driver) Measured value in % Status word 1 Status word 2 Status for Display Test display alarm word Limit HH overshot Limit H overshot Limit L undershot Limit LL undershot Live zero Fault not acknowledged Gradient negative Gradient positive Measuring channel blocked Switching limit HH overshot Switching limit H overshot
DWORD DW#16#0 REAL BYTE REAL REAL REAL INT 0.000000e +000 B#16#0 0.000000e +000 0.000000e +002 0.000000e +000 0
DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 WORD BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7-28
Reference Manual Objects Element SL SLL SUBS_ON SIM_ON Meaning Switching limit L undershot Switching limit LL undershot Substitute value active (driver) Simulation value active (driver) Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default 0 0 0 0 Type Attr. O O O O
Measured Value HMI Permitted Values
7-29
Measured Value
OS variables table
OS Variabl No.
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 SQAR RADI SMOO GRAD SPIKE SUBS SOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Commandword
Commandword
Bit
I/O
16Bit
Quadrieren ein/aus Radizieren ein/aus Gltten ein/aus Gradientenberwachung ein/aus Strspitzenunterdrckung ein/aus
13 Ersatzwert/ltzter gltiger Wert 14 Simulation ON/OFF 15
squaring on/off root extraction on/off smoothing on/off gradient monitoring on/off spike suppression on/off Substitution value/last valid value Simulation ON/OFF
OM OM OM OM OM OM OM
Textfeld Textfeld Textfeld Textfeld Textfeld Textfeld Textfeld
7-30
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
Measured Value
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 HH H L LL ULZ UGN UGP USP SHH SH SL SLL UST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Mewert > Obergrenze 2 Mewert > Obergrenze 1 Mewert < Untergrenze 1 Mewert < Untergrenze 2 Live Zero Gradient negativ berschritten Gradient positiv berschritten Mekanal gesperrt Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze 2 Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze 1 Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze 1 Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze 2 Strung nicht quittiert
Status
MV > upper limit 2 MV > upper limit 1 MV < lower limit 1 MV < lower limit 2 Live Zero Negative gradient overshot Positive gradient overshot Measuring channel blocked MV > upper switching limit 2 MV > upper switching limit 1 MV < lower switching limit 1 MV < lower switching limit 1 Fault not acknowledged
S,O
Bit
16Bit
DRV LVV SUB SIM BYP_A
Verbunden mit Treiber Letzter gltiger Wert Ersatzwert Simulation ON Taster Bypass aktiv
Connected to a driver Last valid value Substitution value Simulation ON Switch Bypass activ
7-31
Measured Value
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 HH H L LL ULZ UGN UGP USP SHH SH SL SLL UST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Bausteinausgnge
Mewert > Obergrenze HH Mewert > Obergrenze H Mewert < Untergrenze L Mewert < Untergrenze LL Live Zero Gradient negativ berschritten Gradient positiv berschritten Mekanal gesperrt Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze HH Mewert > Schalt_Obergrenze H Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze L Mewert < Schalt_Untergrenze LL Strung dynamisch
Moduleflags
MV > upper limit 2 MV > upper limit 1 MV < lower limit 1 MV < lower limit 2 Live Zero Negative gradient overshot Positive gradient overshot Measuring channel blocked MV > upper switching limit 2 MV > upper switching limit 1 MV < lower switching limit 1 MV < lower switching limit 1 Fault dynamic
Bit
16Bit
SQAR RADI SMOO GRAD SPIKE SUBS SIM
Freigabe Quadrieren Freigabe Radizieren Freigabe Gltten Freigabe Gradientenberwachung Freigabe Strspitzenunterdrckung
21 Freigabe Ersatzwert 22 Freigabe Simulation 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Release squaring Release root extraction Release smoothing Release gradient monitoring Release spike suppression Release substitution value active Release simulation value active
7-32
Measured Value
AlarmWord
ALA_HH ALA_H ALA_L ALA_LL ALA_LZ ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_B27 ALA_B10 ALA_B11 ALA_B12 ALA_B13 ALA_B14 ALA_B15 ALA_B16 ALA_REP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Alarm
Mewert > Obergrenze 2 Mewert > Obergrenze 1 Mewert < Untergrenze 1 Mewert < Untergrenze 2 Live Zero
Alarm
MV > upper limit 2 MV > upper limit 1 MV < lower limit 1 MV < lower limit 2 Live Zero AH WH WL AL ALF P P P P E HH HH L LL LZ
7-33
Measured Value
VAL_HH VAL_H VAL_L VAL_LL LZ_TIM SPIK_TIM HYSTERES GRAD_POS GRAD_NEG GRAD_TIM SMOO_TIM VAL_SHH VAL_SH VAL_SL VAL_SLL SUBS_VAL SIM_VAL SCB SCE UNIT MV TYP
Obergrenze 2 Obergrenze 1 Untegrenze 1 Untegrenze 2 Verzgerung Live Zero (s) Strspitzenunterdrckung (s) Hysterese Gradient positiv Gradient negativ Gradientenverzgerung (s) Glttungszeit (s) Obere Schaltgrenze 2 Obere Schaltgrenze 1 Untere Schaltgrenze 1 Untere Schaltgrenze 2 Ersatzwert von OS Simulationswert von OS Skalenanfang Skalenende Dimension Mewert Typ des eingelesenen Werts
Upper limit 2 Upper limit 1 Lower limit 1 Lower limit 2 Delay Live Zero (s) Spike suppression (s) Hysteresis Gradient positive Gradient negative Gradient delay (s) Smoothing time (s) Upper switching limit 2 Upper switching limit 1 Lower switching limit 1 Lower switching limit 2 Substitute value Simulation value Start of scale End of scale Unit Measured Value Measured value type
D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D S,O; D D
xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx xxx x.y xx.y xx.y xxx xxx xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy xxx.yy String xxx.yy
CFC CFC CFC CFC sec. sec. % % % sec. sec. CFC CFC CFC CFC
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O O O IO O
real real real real 0-999 0-999 0.0-9.9 0.0-99.9 0.0-99.9 0-999 0-999 real real real real real real real real
OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM OM
VAL_HH VAL_H VAL_L VAL_LL LZ_TIM SPIK_TIM HYSTERES GRAD_POS GRAD_NEG GRAD_TIM SMOO_TIM VAL_SHH VAL_SH VAL_SL VAL_SLL SUBS_VAL SIM_VAL SCB SCE
CFC
1-255
7-34
Measured Value
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 UAMV RA_HH RA_H RA_L RA_LL RA_LZ UWFR USCB UGWB 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Nahtstellenwort
Freigabe Strmeldung Obergrenze 2 Freigabe Strmeldung Obergrenze 1 Freigabe Strmeldung Untergrenze 1 Freigabe Strmeldung Untergrenze 2 Freigabe Strmeldung Live zero Mekanal/Mewert freigeben Mewert-Ausgang auf SKA Freigabe Grenzwertberechnung
Interfaceword
Release of fault indication for Upper limit 2 Release of fault indication for Upper limit 1 Release of fault indication for lower limit 1 Release of fault indication for lower limit 2 Release of fault indication for live zero Rel. Meas. channel/MV Set MV Output to SCB Rel. Limit value calculation
Bit
32Bit
UMFR UMZS
16 Alarmverriegelung 17 18 19 Meldefreigabe 20 Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe 21 22 23 24 25 Quittieren (Zusatz) 26 27 28 29 30 31
Alarm interlock
Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group
UQIT
7-35
Measured Value
7-36
Measured Value
7-37
Route
8 Route
8 ROUTE
Description of C_ROUTE Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_ROUTE OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 4 4 5 8 8 9 10 10 12 13 13 13 15 16 19
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\08_W_e.doc
8-1
Route
Description of C_ROUTE
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_ROUTE FB1009
Calling OBs
C_ROUTE must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
8-2
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\08_W_e.doc
Route
Function
The route is a module for the selection of transport directions within a group. The route module allows the visualization of the operational conditions for a transport direction within a plant section, displayed as a status display, and a detailed fault diagnosis (status call). Depending on the selected transport direction, only certain drives of the group are triggered. For the visualization of the operational conditions of the group as well, only those drives which belong to the selected transport direction are analysed. For this, one must assign to a route all the drives, messages and measured values, which belong to that transport direction. The route can be selected and deselected with conventional control desk pushbuttons, via the OS or through the program. The group start/stop is passed on to the drives through the selected route. The feedback of the drives is transferred to the group through the selected route. The display of the faults and interlocks of the group refers to the selected routes. Following states are displayed in the block icon of the route: Fault: Interlocked: Operation: Locked : Fault in an object that is assigned to the route Interlock of the route Operational condition of the route (deselected, pre-selected, etc.) Selection changeover released or locked (manual interlocking).
The route generates operation annunciations for pre-selection and de-selection. With a status call of the route, all present drive faults/interlocks, measured values and process signals of a transport direction can be queried. At a group with routes, the group status call effects only the selected routes of the group.
8-3
Route
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
WVT Pre-selection ON/OFF Pushbutton Basic state 0-signal If the route is to be selected/deselected using a conventional control desk key, the WVT parameter must be connected with the input signal of the pushbutton. A 1-signal at WVT parameter results in selection when the route has been deselected and in de-selection when the route has been pre-selected. Two-handed operation is needed to pre-select/deselect the route using control desk pushbuttons. WVT and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously. Caution: The control desk pushbutton can be used only when the GPTS interface (control desk pushbutton release) is connected with a 1-signal and in the system chard "SYSPLCxx" the parameter "FGS" of the block C_PUSHBT is connected with a signal (release button).
8-4
Route
Input interfaces
WEVG Start interlock Basic state 1-signal A 0-signal at interface WEVG prevents the setting of route selection WVW. Via interface WEVG one can interlock mutually several routes. The start interlock is visualized in the status display of the routes. If one wants to see the reason for the interlock in the status call of the route, one must program an annunciation module and assign it to the route (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
WBVG
Operating interlock
A 0-signal at interface WBVG prevents the setting of route selection WVW. An already operating route is switched off if the operating interlock is missing. The operating interlock is visualized in the status display of the routes. If one wants to see the reason for the interlock in the status call of the route, one must program an annunciation module and assign it to the route (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
WHVR
Manual interlock
A 0-signal at interface WHVR locks the route changeover via pushbutton or through the OS. E.g., with this one can prevent a route from being deselected while a group is running or prevent a route changeover from being possible during start-up and slow-down.
WPTS
Release of control desk pushbuttons
In the basic state, the route changeover is released via the OS. The control desk pushbuttons are locked. By connecting this interface with a 1-signal the control desk pushbuttons are released and operation via OS is blocked.
WUUS
Release Pre-selection OFF WVWL
The delete pre-selection function (interface WVWL) and the setting of the changeover flag WUM is possible only if interface WUUS is connected with a 1-signal. For details of the application of the interface for an uninterrupted route changeover refer to the engineering manual.
WSAZ
Supplementary fault (dynamic)
A possibility for connecting with dynamic faults which cannot automatically be acquired via drives and annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface WSAZ and selected route the group indicates dynamic faults. Caution: If the interface is to behave exactly like a drive fault one must ensure that the interface becomes 0 after the acknowledgement.
WSTZ
Supplementary fault (static)
A possibility for connecting with static faults which cannot automatically be acquired drives and annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface WSTZ of the selected route the group indicates static faults.
8-5
Route
WREZ
Feedback ON
The WREZ interface must have status 1-signal if all drives of the route are running. It can be, for example, the last drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives which are triggered in parallel. The connection is made through the logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit positions of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2). Caution: Please observe the connection examples in the engineering manual because one must also interlock the starting condition for sporadically operating drives!
WRAZ
Feedback OFF
The WRAZ interface must have status 1-signal if all drives of the route are stopped. It can be, for example, the first drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives which are triggered in parallel. The connection is made through the negated logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit positions of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2).
WVWT
Pre-selection ON/OFF
Interface WVWT is synonymous with module parameter WVT. Signal change from 0 to 1 at WVWT or WVT effects a route changeover, i.e. the pre-selected route is deselected and the deselected route is pre-selected. Attention: The parameter is effective only when in the system chard "SYSPLCxx" the parameter "FGS" of the block C_PUSHBT is connected with a signal (release button)
WVWE
Pre-selection ON
Via a 1-signal at interface WVWE one can pre-select a route through the program (e.g. through a process signal). This function is required for automatic route changeovers.
WVWA
Selection OFF
WVWA has a similar effect as signal GASL of the group. (With a 1-signal at the interface WVWA, an OFF feedback is simulated to the route.) For this the route must already be deselected and switched off. (WVE and WDE must have a 0-signal). Application with uninterrupted route changeover: Route selection WVW is normally cancelled only if the complete route is stationary. Since for an uninterrupted changeover there are always some drives continuing to operate, this is actually never the case. The cancelling of the route selection must be done artificially with WVWA. (See also uninterrupted route changeover in the engineering manual!)
WVWL
Pre-selection OFF
A 1-Signal at interface WVWL deletes the route pre-selection (WVE). With a running route, signal WBA is set for switching off the drives. By means of interface WVWL the route can be deselected via program (e.g. through pre-selection of another route or through a process signal). For this function the parameter WUUS must have 1-signal.
8-6
Route
WLPZ
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using WLPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
WEBW
Command ON
Interface WEBW must be connected with the GBE-signal of the associated group. During the start of the group (1-signal at interface WEBW) the selected route sets the ON command WBE to start the drives.
WGWA
Command OFF
Interface WGWA must be connected with the GDA-signal or the negated GDE-signal of the associated group. During the stop of the group (1-signal at interface WGWA) the selected route sets the OFF command WBA to stop the drives.
DSIG_BQ
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the motor.
8-7
Route
Releases
REL_A_SL Release select/deselect operating message Basic state 1-signal A 1-signal at the REL_A_SL interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as the route gets selected or deselected.
REL_A_OP
Release running/stopped operating message
A 1-signal at the REL_A_OP interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as the route runs completely or stops completely.
Links
The fault of the drive is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route is used to display the details of the fault. To guarantee this function, every group must be connected with the routes or the objects (drives, annunciation modules and measured values) that belong to this group from an annunciation viewpoint.
G_LINK
Associated groups
The G_LINK interface of the group must be connected with the G_LINK interface of the route.
R_LINK
Associated objects
The R_LINK interface of the route must be connected with the GR_LINK interface of the drives, annunciation modules and measured values.
If objects belong to more than 2 routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be called before the associated object (drive, annunciation module, measured value). C_MUX has five inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for the connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive. This facility permits the objects to be assigned to a maximum of 7 groups/routes. If this also does not suffice, further C_MUX modules must be switched in sequence.
8-8
Route
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Observe the processing sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
8-9
Route
Process values
The process values can be set during engineering and they can be changed online from the OS. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be connected in the CFC. There are no process values for the route.
Output interfaces
WBE Command ON With a 1-signal at interface WEBW the route generates signal WBE. For this, the route must be selected (WVW and WVE be set) and operating interlock WBVG must have a 1-signal. Signal WBE is mainly used for starting the drives.
WBA
Command OFF
WBA is the signal of the route to stop the drives. WBA depends on pre-selection memory WVW and has status 1 - if the selected route is switched off (group stop or route changeover), - during de-selection of the route, - if the operating interlock is not present anymore.
WDE
Continuous command ON
Signal WDE is set together with signal WBE and has status 1 until the route is switched off. Most common application: Switch-off of the drives through negated signal WDE instead of WBA.
WRE
Feedback ON
Signal WRE has status 1 if the route runs completely i.e. if interface WREZ of the route is connected with 1-signal. The WRE-signal is applied to connect to the group feedback ON.
WRA
Feedback OFF
Signal WRA has status 0 if the route is completely at stop or if the route is not selected (WVW has 0-signal). The negated WRA-signal is applied to connect to the group feedback OFF.
WVE
Route pre-selected
Signal WVE has status 1 if the route is pre-selected. The following have an effect on signal WVE: - the route pre-selection key (WVT) - a programmed route changeover via interfaces (WVWE, WVWL, WVWT) - the commands from the OS (Pre-selection ON, Pre-selection OFF, Changeover).
8-10
Route
WVW
Route selected
Signal WVW stores pre-selection WVE depending on the operational condition of the route. With a switched off route and when all interlocks are OK, signal WVW corresponds to signal WVE, that means, both have exactly the same status. Set condition: The route sets signal WVW if, together with the 1-signal of WVE, the operating interlock and the start interlock (WBVG and WEVG) also have 1-signal. Reset condition: To reset WVW one must deselect the route (WVE and WDE must have a 0signal) and the route must be completely switched off (connecting interface WRAZ or WVWA with 1-signal). WVW and WVE can both be used for interlocking purposes. WVE expresses the pre-selection of the route (route pre-selected) and WVW the status of the route selection (route selected).
WUM
Route changeover flag
Signal WUM is present for the duration of the route changeover. Set condition: Signal WUM is set with the route pre-selection (interface WVWE or WVWT, OS command or route pre-selection key WVT). Reset condition is the route feedback ON (WREZ) or the de-selection of the route (negated WVE signal). The route module sets the changeover flag only if one connects interface WUUS (uninterrupted changeover) with a 1-signal. You will find an example of the application of signal WUM in the uninterrupted route changeover in the engineering manual).
WST
Fault
Signal WST has status 1 if the route has a dynamic or static fault.
GSD
Fault dynamic
If there is a dynamic fault (alarm) GSD has 1-signal. After quit the GSD becomes 0-signal.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver block.
Hardware outputs
WVL Route pre-selection lamp The WVL signal can be applied to connect a control desk lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous light indicates the pre-selection of the route. A flashing light indicates an interlock or a fault. A 0-signal indicates that the route has been deselected.
8-11
Route
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Command word
Status 2
NO_OF_FT Interface to OS
Number in status call buffer for OS
FT1 FT2 . . FT30 Interface to OS
Cell in status call buffer for OS Cell in status call buffer for OS
Cell in status call buffer for OS
8-12
Route
The module must be called after the associated objects and before the associated group.
Module states
Status display of the route: 1st column: L (blue) 2nd column: D (white) P (green) S (green) O (green) 3rd column: F (red) 4th column: I (yellow) = locked = deselected = pre-selected = selected = operation (all drives are running, dampers in limit position) = fault = interlock
8-13
Route

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 deselected locked + deselected deselected + fault locked + deselected + fault Pre-selected + fault + interlocked locked + pre-selected + fault + interlocked Pre-selected + interlocked locked + pre-selected + interlocked selected locked + selected selected + fault locked + selected + fault selected + fault not acknowledged S locked + selected + fault not acknowledged S selected + interlocked locked + selected + interlocked completely running locked + completely running completely running + fault locked + completely running + fault completely running + fault not ackn. S locked + completely running + fault not ack. S deselected + interlocked locked + deselected + interlocked deselected + fault + interlocked locked + deselected + fault + interlocked selected + fault + interlocked locked + selected + fault + interlocked selected + fault not ack. + interlocked locked + selected + fault not ack. + interlocked deselected + fault not ack. S S S Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white
Display
Text Presentation
Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white
S = blinking 8-14
Route
Remark : The indication "selected" will be still displayed even after deselecting the route until all drives are stopped. To distinguish this, the symbol will be shown with the colours black/white.
Commands
8-15
Route
I/O-bar of C_ROUTE
C_ROUTE
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O U + U U U U U + U U Permitted Values
Element WVT WEVG WBVG WHVR WPTS WUUS WSAZ WSTZ WREZ WRAZ WVWT WVWE WVWA WVWL WLPZ WEBW WGWA DSIG_BQ REL_A_SL REL_A_OP TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND G_LINK INTFC_OS
Meaning Route pre-selection pushbutton Start interlock Operating interlock Manual interlock Release of control desk pushbuttons Uninterrupted route changeover Supplementary fault (dynamic) Supplementary fault (static) Feedback ON Feedback OFF Pre-selection ON/OFF Pre-selection ON Selection OFF Pre-selection OFF Lamp test (additional) Command ON Command OFF Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Release operating message select/deselect Release operating message running/stopped Must not be changed Message ID Command word Association to the group Interface status for OS
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT
Default 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Attr. U
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT W#16#0 0
DWORD DW#16#0
8-16
Reference Manual Objects Element STATUS STATUS2 ALARM NO_OF_FT FT1 FT2 FT3 FT4 FT5 FT6 FT7 FT8 FT9 FT10 FT11 FT12 FT13 FT14 FT15 FT16 FT17
FT18
Route Default W#16#0 Typ e O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Attr. U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + HMI + + Permitted Values
Meaning Status word for test Block output status for OS Alarm word for test Number in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer
Format WORD
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FT19 FT20 FT21 FT22 FT23 FT24
8-17
Route Element FT25 FT26 FT27 FT28 FT29 FT30 WBE WBA WDE WRE WRA WVE WVW WUM WST WSD SIM_ON WVL R_LINK Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format INT INT INT INT INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Typ e O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U Attr. U U U U U U HMI + + + + + + Permitted Values
Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Command ON Command OFF Continuous command ON Feedback ON Feedback OFF Route pre-selected Route selected Route changeover flag Fault Fault not acknowledged Simulation ON Route pre-selection lamp Associated objects
8-18
Route
OS variables table
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
Commandword
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 WEGZU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Commandword
Wege-Zustandsaufruf
Commandword
Route status call-up
I/O
16Bit
SEL_OFF SEL_ON
8 9 Vorwahl AUS 10 Vorwahl EIN 11 12 13 14 15
Selection OFF Selection ON
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
8-19
Route
StatusWord
STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 DESEL PRESEL SEL IOP INT LOCK 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status
Abgewhlt Vorgewhlt Gewhlt luft vollstndig Verriegelt Gesperrt
Status
Deselected Pre-selected Selected Completely running Interlocked Locked
S,O
Bit
16Bit
FAULT NQT
8 Strung 9 Strung nicht quittiert 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fault acknowledged Fault not acknowledged
AlarmWord
ALA_DSEL ALA_SEL ALA_IOP ALA_NIO ALA_B24 ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_B27 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Weg Abwahl Weg Anwahl Weg luft Weg steht
Alarm
Route deselection Route pre-selection Route running Route stopped OM OM OM OM Abwahl Anwahl luft steht
8-20
Route
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 WBE WBA WDE WRE WRA WVE WVW WUM WST WSD 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bausteinausgnge
Befehl Ein Befehl Aus Dauerbefehl Ein Rckmeldung Ein Rckmeldung Aus Vorwahl Ein Weg gewhlt Wegeumschaltmerker Strung Strung dynamisch
Moduleflags
Command On Command Off Continuous Command On Feedback On Feedback Off Pre-selection ON Route selected Route changeover flag Fault Fault dynamic
Bit
16Bit
SQT BQU WVT WVL REL_A_SL REL_A_OP
Sequenz Test Bad Quality Wegvorwahltaste Wegvorwahllampe Freigabe Meldung (Start/Stop) Freigabe Meldung (luft/Steht)
Sequence Test Bad Quality Route pre-selection key Route pre-selection lamp Release annunciation (Start/Stop) Release annunciation (run/stop)
8-21
Route
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 WEVG WBVG WHVR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Nahtstellen-Zustand
Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Handverriegelung
Interfaceflags
Start interlock Operating interlock Manual interlock
Bit
32Bit
WPTS WUUS
Freigabe Pulttasten
Release of Pushbuttons
WSAZ WSTZ
8 Unterbrechungsfreie Umschaltung Uninterrupted Route changeover 9 10 11 12 13 Strungszusatz (dynamisch) Supplementary fault (dynamic) 14 Strungszusatz (statisch) Supplementary fault (static) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
WREZ WRAZ
Rckmeldung Ein Rckmeldung Aus
Feedback ON Feedback OFF
WVWT WVWE WVWA WVWL WLPZ WEBW WGWA
Vorwahl-Taste Vorwahl Ein Vorwahl Aus Vorwahl lschen Lampen prfen (Zusatz) Befehl Ein Befehl Aus
Pre-selection key Pre-selection ON Pre-selection OFF De-selection Lamp test (additional) Command ON Command OFF
8-22
Route
NO_OF_FT FT1 FT2 FT3 FT4 FT5 FT6 FT7 FT8 FT9 FT10 FT11 FT12 FT13 FT14 FT15 FT16 FT17 FT18 FT19 FT20 FT21 FT22 FT23 FT24 FT25 FT26 FT27 FT28 FT29 FT30
Anzahl gestrter Objekte Fehlerhaftes Objekt 1 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 2 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 3 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 4 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 5 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 6 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 7 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 8 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 9 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 10 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 11 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 12 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 13 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 14 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 15 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 16 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 17 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 18 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 19 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 20 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 21 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 22 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 23 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 24 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 25 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 26 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 27 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 28 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 29 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 30
Number of faulty objects Faulty object 1 Faulty object 2 Faulty object 3 Faulty object 4 Faulty object 5 Faulty object 6 Faulty object 7 Faulty object 8 Faulty object 9 Faulty object 10 Faulty object 11 Faulty object 12 Faulty object 13 Faulty object 14 Faulty object 15 Faulty object 16 Faulty object 17 Faulty object 18 Faulty object 19 Faulty object 20 Faulty object 21 Faulty object 22 Faulty object 23 Faulty object 24 Faulty object 25 Faulty object 26 Faulty object 27 Faulty object 28 Faulty object 29 Faulty object 30
GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
8-23
Route
8-25
Group
9 Group
9 GROUP
Description of C_GROUP Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_GROUP OS variables table Description of C_MUX Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Input interfaces Output interfaces I/O-bar of C_MUX
1
2 2 2 3 5 5 6 10 10 10 11 12 13 16 17 17 17 18 19 23 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 31
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\09_G_e.doc
9-1
Group
Description of C_GROUP
Type/Number
Main module: Module name: Module no.: C_GROUP FB1010
Supplementary module: Module name: Module no.: C_MUX FC1017
Calling OBs
C_GROUP must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
9-2
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005
Group
Function
The group is a superordinated module for starting and stopping and for monitoring of technologically grouped plant sections. The group module enables the visualization of the operational conditions of a plant section, displayed as a status display, and a detailed fault diagnosis (status call). For this, one must assign to a group the drives, annunciations and measured values which are part of this plant section. The group can be started or stopped via the OS, or via conventional control desk pushbuttons, or via the program. A start-up warning is triggered when a group is started, the times for the start-up warning (horn time/waiting time) can be set as process valuesAfter the start-up warning has elapsed, the group generates the ON-command to start the drives. The ON-command is limited by the release time, i.e. the start process is aborted after the set release time has elapsed.
There are 3 operating modes: Automatic One starts and stops a technological a plant section with this group. During the start the group generates a start-up warning. After the start of the group all affiliated objects (drives, measured values and process signals (annunciation modules)) are monitored. An alarm message is generated automatically in the case of a fault.
Single-start enabled (interlocked) In this mode one can start and stop the drives belonging to a group separately. All interlocks are effective. This means, one can start the drives only in the order set by the interlocking sequence. An alarm message is generated automatically in the case of a fault. In this mode no Group start is possible.
Local operation enabled In this mode only the protection interlock for the safety switches is effective. The drives can be controlled with locally installed switches/pushbuttons. No alarm message is generated in the case of a fault. The start and operating interlock as well as the protection interlock of automatic mode (e.g. belt drift) are not effective. No EVS signal is generated either. In this mode no Group start is possible.
The operating mode changeover for the drives is carried out group-wise, i.e. the group generates the release signals for operating modes local and single-start which must be connected to the interfaces of the corresponding drives.
9-3
Group
Changeover between automatic <--> local mode at the group: Open the faceplate of the group and press the button Local. Running drives continue to run.
Changeover between automatic <--> single-start mode at the group: Open the faceplate of the group and press the button Single. Already running drives continue to run. All interlock conditions are active.
A changeover between local mode and single-start mode is not possible.
The following states are displayed in the block icon of the group: Fault: Interlocked: Operation: Mode: Fault in any object that is assigned to the group Interlocking of the group or interlocking of the pre-selected route Operational condition of the route (running, stopped, start-up etc.) Automatic, local or single-start mode.
The group generates operation annunciations when starting and stopping.
With a status call of the group, all the present faults and interlocks of the affiliated drives, measured values and process signals in this plant section can be queried at anytime. For a group with routes, the status call effects only the pre-selected routes of the group.
9-4
Group
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
GTA Group push button OFF Basic state 1-signal If the group is to be started/stopped using conventional control desk pushbuttons, the GTA parameter must be connected with the input signal of the Stop pushbutton. A 0-signal deactivates the group. Two-handed operation is necessary to switch off the group using control desk pushbuttons. GTA and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously. Caution: The control desk pushbuttons take effect only when the GPTS (release control desk pushbuttons) interface has been connected with a 1-signal.
GTE
Group push button ON
If the group is to be started/stopped using conventional control desk pushbuttons, the GTE parameter must be connected with the input signal of the Start pushbutton. A 1-signal activates the group. Two-handed operation is necessary to switch on the group using control desk pushbuttons. GTE and the FGS release pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously. Caution: The control desk pushbuttons take effect only when the GPTS (release control desk pushbuttons) interface has been connected with a 1-signal.
9-5
Group
Input interfaces
GEVG Start interlock Basic state 1-signal A 0-signal at interface GEVG prevents the starting of the group. Interface GEVG must be connected with all interlock conditions which are necessary to start the group (e.g. the route must be pre-selected or another group must be running). This ensures that the group does not generate a start-up warning when starting conditions are missing. The start interlock is visualized in the group status display. If one wants to see the reason for the interlock in the status call of the group, one must program an annunciation module and assign it to the group (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
GBVG
Operating interlock
A 0-signal at interface GBVG prevents the start of the group or switches off a running group. The switching off of a group through this interlock must be acknowledged, otherwise the group cannot be started again! The operating interlock is visualized in the group status display. If one wants to see the reason for the interlock in the status call of the group, one must program an annunciation module and assign it to the group (see engineering manual: interlock annunciations).
GAVG
Switch-off interlock
When interface GAVG is connected with a 0-signal it is not possible to switch off the group with the normal Stop-button, but the Quick-stop-button and the interface GABG are still active.
GAFS
Start-up warning external trigger
External start of the start-up warning. Therefore the interface GUMS must be set to 0-signal. The start-up warning is not given with the group start, but with 1-signal at GAFS. After start-upwarning and the waiting time has elapsed the group can be started by pressing the start button.
GUMS
Enable internal start up warning
With 1-signal at GUMS the start-up-warning is given by pressing the start button. A 0-signal at the interface GUMS inhibits the normal start-up warning. The start-up warning must be started from extern via interface GAFS.
GASL
Delete selection memory
With a 1-signal at interface GASL the group status OFF (GRAZ has a 1-signal) is pretended. Application with groups with very long overtravel times. When switching off the group, the group status display would blink until the last drive is stopped. One can forestall the GRAZ by connecting the OFF Feedback of all drives to interface GASL, except for those that have a long overtravel time.
9-6
Group
GSAZ
Supplementary fault (dynamic)
A possibility for connecting dynamic faults which cannot be automatically acquired via drives and annunciation modules. With a 1-signal at interface GSAZ the group indicates dynamic faults. Caution: If the interface is to behave exactly like a drive fault, one must ensure that the interface becomes 0 after acknowledgement.
GSTZ
Supplementary fault (static)
A possibility for connecting static faults which cannot be automatically acquired via drives and annunciation modules. With 1-signal at interface GSTZ the group indicates static faults.
GFGS
Release signal
Application with control desk engineering. If there are several control desks with several release pushbuttons, then one must connect the corresponding release pushbuttons to this interface. Caution: Using GFGS the release interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
GFTR
Enable start re-trigger
When the start-up-procedure of a group has been interrupted by a fault and one restarts the group within the release-time, no start-up-warning will be given and the Command ON (GBE) becomes 1-signal at once. The release time will be reset to the start value. With 0-signal at GFTR a start-up-warning will be given for each start.
GQSP
Quick stop
In some situations it may be necessary to stop the drives of a group instantaneously (without stop delay). The so-called quick stop is possible via the OS or via 1-Signal at interface GQSP. For this, one must connect signal GQS of the group to interface QSTP of the drives (E and V). Separate interlocking is also possible with dampers (e.g. forced close).
GPTS
Release of control desk pushbuttons
In the basic state, operation via the OS is released and the control desk pushbuttons are inhibited. By connecting this interface with a 1-signal, the control desk pushbuttons are released and operation through OS is inhibited.
9-7
Group
GREZ
Feedback ON
This interface must be connected with a 1-signal if all drives in this group are running. It can be, for example, the last drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives if they are triggered in parallel. The group feedback ON limits the start command of the group (reset of GBE signal) and is necessary for the visualization (group runs completely). Depending on whether or not the group has routes, one must use for the connection the logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit position of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2) or the feedback of the routes WRE. Caution: Please observe the connection examples in the engineering manual, because with sporadically running drives one must also interlock the start conditions! Starting the group is only possible if there is a 0-signal at interface GREZ! This is important when additional routes shall be started while a group is already running.
GRAZ
Feedback OFF
This interface must be connected with a 1-signal if all drives in this group are stopped. It can, for example, be the first drive of a conveyor system or also a series of drives if they are triggered in parallel. The group feedback OFF limits the switch-off command of the group (reset of GDA signal) and is necessary for the visualization (group status off). Depending on whether or not the group has routes, one must use the negated logic signal of the drives (EVS) or the limit position of the dampers and valves (KVS1/2, VVS1/2) or the negated feedback of the routes WRA. For connection examples refer to the engineering manual.
GLPZ
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using GLZP the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
GQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If there are several control desks and one wants to acknowledge separately from each, one connects the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) to this interface. Caution: Using GQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
9-8
Group
GEBG
Command ON
Interface to start the group via the program. The group is switched on with a positive edge at interface GEBG (signal change from 0 to 1).
GABG
Command OFF
Interface for automatic switch off of the group through the program. With a 1-signal at interface GABG the group is switched off.
DSIG_BQ
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the group.
9-9
Group
Input interfaces Releases

REL_A_ST Release start/stop operating message Basic state 1-signal A 1-signal at the REL_A_ST interface produces an operating message to be issued as soon as the group is started and stopped.
REL_A_OP
Release running/stopped operat. Message
A 1-signal at the REL_A_OP interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as the group runs completely or stops completely.
Links
The fault of the drive is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route is used to display the details of the fault. To guarantee this function, every group must be connected with the routes or the objects (drives, annunciation modules and measured values) that belong to this group from an annunciation viewpoint.
G_LINK
Associated routes/objects
The G_LINK interface of the group must be connected with the G_LINK interface of the route or with the GR_LINK interface of the drives, annunciation modules and measured values.
If objects belong to more than 2 routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be called before the associated object (drive, annunciation module, measured value). C_MUX has five inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for the connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive. This facility permits the objects to be assigned to a maximum of 7 groups/routes. If this also does not suffice, further C_MUX modules must be switched in sequence.
9-10
Group
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
9-11
Group
Process values
HORN_TIM
Horn time
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During the start of the group, the GHA signal is set for the duration of the horn time to give an audible warning.
WAIT_TIM
Waiting time
Default: 15
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. The waiting time is the time between the start of the group and the starting of the drives. The waiting time must be set long enough to enable people to leave the danger zone.
RELS_TIM
Release time
Default: 300
Format INTEGER (0 - 9999) Value in seconds. The ON-command of the group required to start the drives is limited to this set release time. The release time starts when the waiting time elapses and ends - after the set period of time - when the group runs completely (GREZ has 1-signal) - when the group detects a fault - when the group is switched off.
9-12
Group
Output interfaces
GBE Command ON After a group is started and the waiting time has elapsed the GBE signal is set and it has status 1 until - the release time has elapsed - the group runs completely - the group recognizes a fault - the group is switched off during the start-up. Signal GBE is used mainly to start the drives.
GBA
Command OFF
Signal GBA is generated with the group stop. GBA is only a switch-off impulse (1-signal is only present as long as the OFF-pushbutton is pressed or as long as the OFF-command of the group is present). GBA is normally not used for switching off the drives (impulse is too short), however it is used to reset stored start conditions, e.g. with sporadically operating drives.
GDE
Continuous command ON
Signal GDE is set together with signal GBE and has status 1 until a stop command is given. Most common application: switching off of the drives through the negated signal GDE.
GDA
Continuous command OFF
Signal GDA is set together with signal GBA and has status 1 until the group is completely stopped. One can use signal GDA to switch off the drives. However it is better to use the negated GDE signal, especially if the drive is to be started/stopped by several groups.
GRE
Feedback ON
Signal GRE has status 1 when the group runs completely, i.e. when interface GREZ of the group has a 1-signal.
GRA
Feedback OFF
Signal GRA has status 1 when the group is completely switched off, i.e. when interface GRAZ has a 1-signal.
9-13
Group
GLO
Local mode
A 1-signal means the group is in local mode. Connecting Signal GLO to the local release xLOC of all affiliated drives, the local mode of the drives will be enabled group-wise (by switching the group into local mode). The local release xLOC of the affiliated drives is connected with signal GLO of the group, i.e. only if the group is in local mode, is the local mode released by the PLC.
GES
Single-start mode
A 1-signal means the group is in single-start mode. Connecting Signal GES to the Single start release xEIZ of all affiliated drives, the single start mode of the drives will be enabled group-wise (by switching the group into single-start mode).
GVG
Selection memory
Signal GVG is set during the start of the group and has status 1 until the group is stopped completely (interface GRAZ has a 1-signal). Signal GVG is used for general interlocks. One can, for example, OR the negated signal GVG with the GRE signal. With this, one has a signal which has status 0 only during the start-up time and the shut-down time of a group, otherwise it has status 1. This signal could, for example, be connected to the manual interlock WHVR of the route. Hence, the route changeover is inhibited for the duration of the start-up and shut-down.
GQS
Quick stop
Signal GQS has status 1 when the pushbutton quick stop on the OS is activated or when interface GQSP is connected with a 1-signal. This function is meant for suppressing the stop delay of the drives and for the immediate stopping of the group. If quick stop is required, one must connect interface QSTP of drives E and V with signal GQS of the corresponding group.
GST
Fault
Signal GST has status 1 if there are dynamic or static faults in the group.
GSD
Fault dynamic
If there is a dynamic fault (alarm) GSD has 1-signal. After quit the GSD becomes 0-signal.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
ACK
Acknowledge group-wise
By pressing the button AS-Ack in the faceplate of the group this output becomes 1-signal for one cycle. In order to permit group-wise acknowledgement one has to connect this output to the acknowledgement interface xQIT of all objects belonging to the group (e. g. EQIT for C_DRV_1D).
9-14
Group
Hardware outputs
GZV Group interlocked lamp Signal GZV can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available). A 0-signal means that no interlock is present. A blinking light means a dynamic (not acknowledged) interlock and a continuous light means a static (already acknowledged) interlock of the group.
GZS
Group fault lamp
Signal GZS can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available). A 0-signal means that no fault is present. A blinking light means a dynamic (not acknowledged) fault and a continuous light means a static (already acknowledged) fault of the group.
GZB
Group operation lamp
Signal GZB can be used to connect a control desk lamp (if no visualization system is available). A 0-signal means that the group is not running. A continuous light means that the group is running completely and a blinking light means the start-up or shut-down of the group.
GLA
Start-up warning lamp
With the start of the group (setting of signal GVG) signal GLA is also set. It has status 1 until the start-up process is completed, i.e. - the group runs completely (GREZ has 1-signal) or - the release time has elapsed or - the group recognizes a fault or - the group is switched off. Signal GLA of the group can be allocated to an output in order to switch on a warning lamp.
GHA
Start-up warning horn
Signal GHA is set during the start of the group. It has status 1 until the set horn time has elapsed (process value). Signal GHA of the group can be allocated to an output to switch on the horn.
9-15
Group
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Command word
STA2_OS Interface to OS
Status display interlocked for OS
NO_OF_FT Interface to OS
Number in status call buffer for OS
FT1 FT2 . . FT30 Interface to OS
Cell in status call buffer for OS Cell in status call buffer for OS
Cell in status call buffer for OS
9-16
Group
The module must be called after the associated objects and routes.
Module states
Status display of the group: 1st column: A (white) = automatic L (yellow) = local S (blue) = single mode 2nd column: O (green) = operation (white if incomplete; arrows for start-up /shutdown) 3rd column: F (red) 4th column: I (yellow) = fault = interlock
9-17
Group
Variable STATUS: Status/Text Display Operating Mode

Automatic Local Single-start
Display
Symbol
Black, white Black, yellow Black, blue
Status/Text Display Operation
Display
Symbol
Text Presentation
Black, white blinking blinking Black, white Black, white Black, white blinking blinking blinking Black, white Black, white Black, white
Group not in operation
Gray, gray Black, green Black, green Black, green Black, white Black, green Black, green
start-up in automatic mode

shut-down in automatic mode running not completely started does not run completely anymore start command ON
Status/Text Display Fault

No fault In STOP + fault Not in STOP + fault not acknowledged Not in STOP + fault acknowledged
Display
Symbol
Gray, gray White, red White, red White, red blinking
Status/Text Display Interlocked

No interlock Interlocked Interlock resulted in switch-off
Display
Symbol
Gray, gray
Black, yellow
blinking
Commands
9-18
Group
I/O-bar of C_GROUP
C_GROUP
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U Permitted Values
Element GTA GTE GEVG GBVG GAVG GAFS GUMS GASL GSAZ GSTZ GFGS GFTR GQSP GPTS GREZ GRAZ GLPZ GQIT GEBG GABG DSIG_BQ REL_A_ST REL_A_OP TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID
Meaning Group pushbutton OFF Group pushbutton ON Start interlock Operating interlock Switch-off interlock Start-up warning external trigger Changeover signal start-up warning Delete selection memory Supplementary fault (dynamic) Supplementary fault (static) Release signal (additional) enable start re-trigger Quick stop Release of control desk pushbuttons Feedback ON Feedback OFF Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Command ON Command OFF Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Release operating message start/stop Release operating message running/stopped Must not be changed Message ID
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT
Default 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Attr. U U
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0
9-19
Group Element COMMAND HORN_TIM WAIT_TIM RELS_TIM INTFC_OS STATUS STA2_OS ALARM NO_OF_FT FT1 FT2 FT3 FT4 FT5 FT6 FT7 FT8 FT9 FT10 FT11 FT12 FT13 FT14 FT15 FT16 FT17 FT18 FT19 Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format WORD INT INT INT Default W#16#0 0 15 300 Typ e I I I I O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Attr. U HMI + + + + + + + Permitted Values
Command word Horn time Waiting time Release time Interface status for OS Status word for test Status display interlocked for OS Alarm word for test Number in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer
DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9-20
Reference Manual Objects Element FT20 FT21 FT22 FT23 FT24 FT25 FT26 FT27 FT28 FT29 FT30 GBE GBA GDE GDA GRE GRA GLO GES GVG GQS GST GSD SIM_ON ACK GZV GZS Meaning Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Cell in status call buffer Command ON Command OFF Continuous command ON Continuous command OFF Feedback ON Feedback OFF Local mode Single start mode Selection memory Quick stop Fault Fault dynamic Simulation ON Acknowledge group-wise Group interlocked lamp Group fault lamp Format INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Typ e O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O U U Attr. U U U U U U U U U U U HMI + + + + + + + + + + +
Group Permitted Values
9-21
Group Element GZB GLA GHA G_LINK Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL INT Default 0 0 0 0 Typ e O O O O Attr. U HMI Permitted Values
Group operation lamp Start-up warning lamp Start-up warning horn Associated groups/objects
9-22
Group
OS variables table
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
Commandword
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 GRUZU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
Gruppen-Zustandsaufruf
Commandword
Group status call-up
Bit
I/O
16Bit
ACK STP STA RSON AUTON RLON QSTP
Strung Quittieren AUS EIN Einzelbetrieb EIN Automatik EIN Vorortbetrieb EIN Schnellstop
Fault acknowledgement OFF ON single-start mode Automatic ON local mode Quick stop
OM OM OM OM OM
RS ON AUT ON RL ON QSTP
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
9-23
Group
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 O_NIO O_START O_GBE O_IOP O_NFUSTA O_NIOANY O_DOWN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Gruppe steht Start im Automatikbetrieb Startbefehl ein luft vollstnding nicht vollstndig angelaufen luft nicht mehr vollstndig Auslauf im Automatikbetrieb
Status
Group not in operation Start-up in automatic mode Start command ON Completely running not completely started does not run completely anymore shut-down in automatic mode
S,O
Bit
16Bit
F_FAULT F_NQT
Strung Strung nicht quittiert
Fault acknowledged Fault not acknowledged
VIS_OP13 VIS_OP14 VIS_OP15 GBE GBA GDE GDA GRE GRA GLO GES GVG GLA GHA GST GSD
Visu-SS for operation Visu-SS for operation Visu-SS for operation Befehl Ein Befehl Aus Dauerbefehl Ein Dauerbefehl Aus Rckmeldung Ein Rckmeldung Aus Betriebsart Vorort Betriebsart Einzelstart Anwahlspeicher Lampe Anfahrwarnung Hupe Anfahrwarnung Strung Strung dynamisch
Visu-SS for operation Visu-SS for operation Visu-SS for operation Command On Command Off Continuous Command On Continuous Command Off Feedback On Feedback Off Local mode Single-start mode Pre-selection flag Start-up-warning lamp Start-up-warning horn Fault Fault dynamic
9-24
Group
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 M_AUTO M_LOCAL M_SINGLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Automatic Vorort Einzelbetrieb Automatic mode Local mode Single mode
Bit
16Bit
I_INT I_NQT
verriegelt verriegelung fhrt zum Stop
interlocking Stopped by interlocking
SQT BQU GTA GTE GZV GZS GZB
Sequenz Test Bad Quality Gruppentaste AUS Gruppentaste EIN Gruppenzustand verriegelt Gruppenzustand Strung Gruppenzustand Betrieb
Sequence Test Bad Quality Group key OFF Group key ON Group status interlocked Group status Fault Group status Operation
REL_A_ST REL_A_OP
ACK_GR
24 Start/Stop 25 luft/steht 26 27 28 29 30 31 Quittieren gruppenweise
Start/stop On/off
Acknowledge group-wise
9-25
Group
AlarmWord
ALA_STOP ALA_START ALA_IOP ALA_NIO ALA_B24 ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_B27 ALA_B10 ALA_B11 ALA_B12 ALA_B13 ALA_B14 ALA_B15 ALA_B16 ALA_B17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Alarm
Gruppe Stop Gruppe Start Gruppe luft Gruppe steht
Alarm
Group Stop Group Start Group is running Group stopped
O OM OM OM OM STOP START luft steht
HORN_TIM WAIT_TIM RELS_TIM
Hupzeit Wartezeit Freigabezeit
Start up warning time Waiting time Release time
D D D
xxx xxx xxxx
sec. sec. sec.
I/O I/O I/O
0-999 0-999 0-9999
OM OM OM
HORN_TIM WAIT_TIM RELS_TIM
9-26
Group
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 GEVG GBVG GAVG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Nahtstellen-Zustand
Einschaltverriegelung Betriebsverriegelung Ausschaltverriegelung
Interfaceflags
Start interlock Operating interlock Switch-off interlock
Bit
32Bit
GAFS GUMS GASL GSAZ GSTZ GFGS GFTR GQSP GPTS
Anfahrsignal Umschaltung Signal Anfahrwarnung Anwahlspeicher lschen (GVG) Strungszusatz (dynamisch) Strungszusatz (statisch) Freigabesignal Freigabe-Triggerung Schnellstop Freigabe Pulttasten
Start-up signal Signal start-up warning method Delete Group selection (GVG) Supplementary fault (dynamic) Supplementary fault (static) Release signal (additional) Release - triggering Quick stop Release of pushbuttons
GREZ GRAZ
GLPZ GQIT
16 17 Rckmeldung Ein 18 Rckmeldung Aus 19 20 21 22 23 Lampen prfen (Zusatz) 24 Quittierung (Zusatz) 25 26 27 Befehl Ein 28 Befehl Aus 29 30 31
Feedback ON Feedback OFF
Lamp test (additional) Acknowledgement (additional)
GEBG GABG
Command ON Command OFF
NO_OF_FT
Anzahl gestrter Objekte
Number of faulty objects
GZ
9-27
Group
FT1 FT2 FT3 FT4 FT5 FT6 FT7 FT8 FT9 FT10 FT11 FT12 FT13 FT14 FT15 FT16 FT17 FT18 FT19 FT20 FT21 FT22 FT23 FT24 FT25 FT26 FT27 FT28 FT29 FT30 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 1 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 2 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 3 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 4 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 5 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 6 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 7 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 8 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 9 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 10 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 11 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 12 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 13 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 14 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 15 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 16 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 17 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 18 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 19 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 20 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 21 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 22 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 23 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 24 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 25 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 26 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 27 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 28 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 29 Fehlerhaftes Objekt 30 Faulty object 1 Faulty object 2 Faulty object 3 Faulty object 4 Faulty object 5 Faulty object 6 Faulty object 7 Faulty object 8 Faulty object 9 Faulty object 10 Faulty object 11 Faulty object 12 Faulty object 13 Faulty object 14 Faulty object 15 Faulty object 16 Faulty object 17 Faulty object 18 Faulty object 19 Faulty object 20 Faulty object 21 Faulty object 22 Faulty object 23 Faulty object 24 Faulty object 25 Faulty object 26 Faulty object 27 Faulty object 28 Faulty object 29 Faulty object 30

GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ GZ O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
9-28
Group
Description of C_MUX
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_MUX FC1017
Calling OBs
OB1 (MAIN-TASK)
Function
The C_MUX module is used when an object for the status call is assigned to more than 2 groups and/or routes. Each object can be directly assigned to a maximum of 2 groups and/or routes. If more groups/routes are needed, one or, if necessary, more C_MUX must be connected up-stream. The C_MUX must lie before the Object-FB in the call sequence.
9-29
Group
Operating principle
Input interfaces
MUX_IN To connect several C_MUX modules To connect several C_MUX modules, the MUX_OUT output of a C_MUX must be connected with the MUX_IN input of the next C_MUX. Caution: The MUX_IN interface may only be connected with a MUX_OUT signal of another C_MUX module! Note that the upstream C_MUX must also run beforehand in the processing sequence!
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
GR_LINK3
GR_LINK4
GR_LINK5
Output interfaces
MUX_OUT Connection with the objects The MUX_OUT interface must be connected with the MUX_LINK interface of the objects. Caution: The C_MUX must be called before the object FB!
9-30
Group
I/O-bar of C_MUX
C_MUX
Permitted Values
Element MUX_IN GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 GR_LINK3 GR_LINK4 GR_LINK5 MUX_OUT
Meaning To connect several C_MUX modules Associated route/group Associated route/group Associated route/group Associated route/group Associated route/group Connection with the objects
Format INT INT INT INT INT INT INT
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type I I I I I I O
Attr.
HMI
9-31
Selection
10 Selection
10 SELECTION
Description of C_SELECT Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_SELECT OS variables table
1
2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 9
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\10_Aw_e.doc
10-1
Selection
Description of C_SELECT
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_SELECT FB1013
Calling OBs
C_SELECT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The selection module can be used for any kind of selection function. In contrast to the route, it does not provide detailed fault analysis (status call). But, on the other hand, the selection is relatively simple to handle and can be easily used for the selection of individual drives. Selection and de-selection can be done via the OS or through the program. During selection signal AZE is set, which may be used, e.g. to interlock drives. The status of the selection module (ON, OFF, interlocked) can be visualized. The selection module generates operating messages for selection and de-selection.
10-2
Selection
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
The selection module does not have any parameters for hardware inputs.
Input interfaces
AAUS Selection OFF Basic state 0-signal With a 1-signal at interface AAUS and a 1-signal at interface AAVG the selection memory AZE is reset by the program.
AAVG
De-selection interlock
A 0-signal at interface AAVG prevents the resetting of the selection memory. The de-selection interlock is visualized in the status display.
AEIN
Selection ON
With a 1-signal at interface AEIN and a 1-signal at interface AEVG the selection memory AZE is set by the program.
AEVG
Selection interlock
A 0-signal at interface AEVG prevents the setting of the selection memory. The selection interlock is visualized in the status display.
Releases
REL_ANNU Release operating message Select/deselect Basic state 1-signal A 1-signal at the REL_ANNU interface causes an operating message to be issued as soon as a selection or de-selection is carried out.
10-3
Selection
Process values
The process values can be set during engineering and they can be changed online from the OS. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be connected in the CFC. There are no process values for the selection module.
Output interfaces
AZE Selection memory Signal AZE has status 1 with selection ON, status 0 means selection OFF. Selection memory AZE is used to evaluate selection, e.g. to select sporadically operating drives.
Hardware outputs
There are no hardware module outputs for the selection module.
10-4
Selection
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Command word
10-5
Selection
The run sequence can be chosen as desired for the selection module.
10-6
Selection
Module states
Status display of the selection module: 2nd column: D (white) = deselected S (green) = selected 4th column: I (yellow) = interlocked

deselected deselected + interlocked selected selected + interlocked
Display
Text Presentation
Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white
Commands
10-7
Selection
I/O-bar of C_SELECT
C_SELECT
Typ e I I I I I I I I O O O U U U U U U + + Permitted Values
Element AEVG AAVG AEIN AAUS REL_ANNU TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND STATUS ALARM AZE
Meaning Start interlock Switch-off interlock Selection De-selection Release operational annunciations Must not be changed Message ID Command word Status word for test Alarm word for test Selected
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT
Default 1 1 0 0 1 0
Attr.
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD BOOL W#16#0 0
10-8
Selection
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 DESEL SEL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Commandword
Commandword
Bit
I/O
16Bit
8 9 Abwahl 10 Anwahl 11 12 13 14 15
Deselect Select
OM OM
De Sel SEL
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
10-9
Selection
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 AEVG AAVG AEIN AAUS REL_ANNU SELECTED INT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Gewhlt Verriegelt
Status
Selected Interlocked
S,O
Bit
16Bit
Einschaltverriegelung Ausschaltverriegelung Anwahl Abwahl Freigabe Meldung
Selection interlock Deselection interlock Select Deselect Release Annunciation
10-10
Selection
AlarmWord
ALA_SEL ALA_DSEL ALA_B22 ALA_B23 ALA_B24 ALA_B25 ALA_B26 ALA_B27 ALA_B10 ALA_B11 ALA_B12 ALA_B13 ALA_B14 ALA_B15 ALA_B16 ALA_B17 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Alarm
Angewhlt Abgewhlt
Alarm
Selected Deselected OM OM SEL DESE L
10-11
Silo pilot
11 Silo pilot
11 SILO PILOT
Description of C_SILOP Type/Number Calling OBs Function Pulse acquisition Reading an analog value Calibration: Relationship between signals during a silopilot measurement: Sequence of a silopilot measurement: Operating principle Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_SILOP OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 16
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\11_Sp_e.doc
11-1
Silo pilot
Description of C_SILOP
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_SILOP FB1011
Calling OBs
C_SILOP must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
11-2
Silo pilot
Function
With the silopilot module one can determinate silo levels by means of silopilots according to an electromechanical plummet system. The silopilot can be started via command from the control room or via the interface bit SBFE. The silopilot unwinds a measuring tape which is weighed down with a sensing weight. When the weight reaches the material surface, the tractive power at the measuring tape falls. The motor reverses and the sensing weight returns to its start position. The silopilot supplies pulses during the retraction and insertion.
Pulse acquisition
The pulses are acquired and summated directly in the PLC. For this, one must parameterize for this silopilot in the 100 ms program a pulse acquisition function module C_SPCNT. For software reasons one must make sure that the pulses of the silopilot have a pulse duration as well as an interpulse period of >100 s each:
t > 100ms
t > 100ms
If a measurement is completed without any fault, then module C_SILOP calculates the physical silo filling level from the sum of the accrued pulses. If a measurement is aborted with a fault, the last valid measurement is displayed. A faulty measurement can be due to a hardware fault of the silopilot (motor overload, belt-break alarm, time-out, etc.). The silopilot module monitors the run-time of the silopilot from the time of start to the return to the start position. To determine the start position of the silopilot it is necessary to have the input signal upper limit position of the sensing weight (interface SOEF). Should this signal not be available from the hardware, then one must release the simulation at module C_SILOP.
Reading an analog value

As an alternative to the pulse acquisition, a physical measured value of the silo pilot can also be processed.
11-3
Silo pilot
Calibration:
The values for the maximum run-time and maximum number of pulses can be parameterized at module C_SILOP or be determined with a calibration run. Caution: A calibration run can only be performed if signal SOEF is available as hardware! If SOEF has to be simulated by the silopilot module, then a calibration run is not possible! Settings necessary for the monitoring: maximum number of pulses with an empty silo maximum permissive run-time with an empty silo. The calibration run can be started from the control room. This requires an empty silo. The sensing weight is let down to the lower limit of the measurement (tape max. or min. safety SMIN). Afterwards the silopilot retracts the sensing weight to its upper limit position. The run-time (plus 15 % tolerance) required for this is then stored as max. permissive runtime. The sum of the accrued pulses is also stored, it serves for the calculation of the normalized silo filling level and silo empty level value during pulse acquisition.
11-4
Silo pilot
Relationship between signals during a silopilot measurement:

TE: Duration of the starting process The silopilot is started either via command or via interface SBFE. The module output SBE remains set until the signal Upper limit position SOEF has a 0-signal, or until the first count pulse. If these conditions are not fulfilled after 10 seconds, then output SBE is reset and an alarm annunciation is output.
TL: Run-time of the silopilot It is monitored by the silopilot module. If this time exceeds the set value max. run-time, then the silopilot is regarded as being faulty, and an alarm annunciation is output. If SOEF is simulated, the silopilot reaches again its start position after the max. run-time has elapsed.
Sequence of a silopilot measurement:
SBE
SOEF Pos. 100 % VR Calibration run (with empty silo) Measurement of silo level
Pos.
0 % VR
SMIN
TL
max. run time
TL
(max. run time)
with calibration run max. run time = actual run time + 15 %
11-5
Silo pilot
Operating principle
Input interfaces
SEVG Start interlock Basic state 1-signal A 0-signal at interface SEVG means that the silopilot cannot be started. Apart from being used as an interlock during the filling of a silo (danger of spilling or tear-off of the sensing weight), this signal can also be used, amongst other things, to guarantee a minimum starting cycle, i.e. the minimum period between two silopilot starts. If the silopilot manufacturer lays down, for example, for single-phase motors such a waiting time, this must be taken into consideration in the user program by connecting interface SEVG! Disregard of this manufacturers specification can cause damage at the silopilot drive!.
SMUE
Motor overload
A 1-signal at interface SMUE means that the silopilot drive has signalled overload (bimetal).
SBRA
Belt-break alarm
A 1-signal at interface SBRA means that the silopilot has signalled a belt-break alarm (tear-off of the sensing weight).
SVOS
Local switch
A 0-signal at interface SVOS means that the silopilot operates in local mode.
SOEF
Upper limit position of sensing weight
A 1-signal at interface SOEF means that the silopilot is at the upper limit position.
SBFE
Command ON
A 1-signal at interface SBFE means that the silopilot is to be started. Caution: Interface SBFE should not be connected to a continuous signal!
PULS_IN
Input Pulse
In mode " pulse acquisition " the silo pilot counts + 1 with each edge from 0 to 1-signal.
11-6
Silo pilot
Releases
REL_SIM Release simulation of SOEF Basic state 0-signal A 1-signal at the REL_SIM interface simulates the upper limit-position sensing weight (SOEF signal) from the silo pilot module.
MODE_P
Pulse acquisition operating mode
The MODE_P interface is used to select the operating mode of the silo pilot. 1-signal = pulse acquisition. 0-signal = import a physical measured value after finishing the measurement.
REL_ANNU
Release operational annunciations
A 1-signal at the REL_ANNU interface issues an operational annunciation when the silo pilot starts.
Links
The fault of the silo pilot is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every silo pilot must be connected with a route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the silo pilot must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the silo pilot belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected with the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the silo pilot belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the silo pilot. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
11-7
Silo pilot
Silopilot1 C_SILOP MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the silo pilot. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the silo pilot, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
11-8
Silo pilot
Process values
MAXR_TIM
Max. permitted run-time
Default: 11
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. This is the time which the silopilot may max. use for a complete run (retraction and insertion), i.e. from leaving its upper limit position after having received the START command to the renewed reaching of its upper limit position. If this time is exceeded without reaching the limit switch upper limit position of sensing weight (interface SOEF), then the silopilot is regarded as being faulty, the measurement is aborted with fault. The silopilot is no longer faulty from the moment when the interface upper limit position of sensing weight has a 1-signal and the fault is acknowledged. If signal SOEF does not exist as hardware and thus has to be simulated, one cannot determine in this case a run-time error. The measurement is then generally terminated after the end of the max. run-time. The maximum permitted run-time must never be set shorter than 11 seconds.
MAX_PULS
Max. number of pulses (with empty silo)
Default: 1
Format INTEGER (0 999) You must set the maximum number of pulses which are received when the silo is completely empty.
PULS_VAL Format REAL
Pulse value
Default: 1
The number of counted pulses is multiplied by this value.
UNIT
Unit
Default: %
Format STRING (8 characters) Unit of the measured value.
MV_PHYS Format REAL
Input for physical values
Default: 0.0
Parameter MV_PHYS is used to read the silo filling level as a physical value. Parameter MV_PHYS is only read if parameter MODE_P is connected with a 0-signal (no pulse acquisition).
QUALITY Format BYTE
Quality code when using driver modules
Default: 80
The quality code is transferred to the measured value when using driver modules.
11-9
Silo pilot
Output interfaces
MV Format REAL Output of the physical silo filling level value. Measured value
SPL
Silo pilot running
When the silopilot module has been started and runs in automatic mode (= measurement runs) then bit silopilot running is set. It has a 1-signal until the measurement is completed (upper limit position reached) or a fault has occurred.
SPS
Silo pilot faulty
Bit silopilot faulty has a 1-signal if - a not-acknowledged fault is present or - fault motor overload is present or - fault belt-break alarm is present. The bit has again a 0-signal after the above-mentioned conditions do not apply any more.
SEL
Limit position fault
Bit Limit position fault has a 1-signal if - the silopilot should have been started while it was not in upper limit position, - the silopilot does not leave the upper limit position (10s after the start) or - the silopilot has not reached the upper limit position at the end of the max. run-time. The bit has again a 0-signal after the fault has been acknowledged, after a renewed start command or (depending on the fault type) after the upper limit position has been reached again.
SSW
Faulty silo value
Bit SSW has a 1-signal, if after ending the measuring procedure (depending on the parameterisation) - more pulses have accrued than been parameterized (-> max. No. of pulses), - QVZ has been detected during reading of the analog value, - the read analog value has overshot or undershot its nominal range. As soon as the silopilot is restarted SSW has a 0-signal again.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
Hardware outputs
SBE Command ON to silo pilot The SBE signal is used to trigger the silo pilot.
11-10
Silo pilot
Interfaces to OS
Message ID
Command word
MSTIM_OS Interface to OS
Time of last valid measurement
CNT_PULS Test interface
Counted pulses
RUN_TIM Test interface
Run-time in seconds
11-11
Silo pilot
11-12
Silo pilot
Module states
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status / Text Display

Pilot in start position, ready to run Pilot in start position + interlocked Pilot in start position + fault Pilot in Start position + fault not acknowledged Pilot not in start position + fault Pilot not in start position + fault not acknowledged Pilot running Local
Symbol Display
White White Red Blinking red Red Blinking red Green Yellow
Text Presentation
Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white Black, white
Commands
Refer to OS variables table for the assignment of the command word.
11-13
Silo pilot
I/O-bar of C_SILOP
C_SILOP
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O U U + + + U U U U + + + + + + + Permitted Values
Element SEVG SMUE SBRA SVOS SOEF SBFE REL_SIM MODE_P PULS_IN REL_ANNU TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND MAXR_TIM MAX_PULS PULS_VAL UNIT MV_PHYS QUALITY GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK MSTIM_OS VISU_OS MV
Meaning Start interlock Motor overload Belt-break alarm Local switch Upper limit position of sensing weight Command ON Release simulation of SEOF Pulse acquisition mode Input Pulse Release operational annunciations Must not be changed Message ID Command word Maximum permitted run-time Maximum number of pulses (with empty silo) Pulse value Unit Input for physical values Quality code when using driver modules Associated group/route Associated group/route For several routes/groups Time of last valid measurement Status for symbol display Measured value
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT
Default 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
Attr.
HMI
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT REAL STRING [8] REAL BYTE INT INT INT W#16#0 11 1 1.000000e +000 % 0.000000e +000 B#16#80 0 0 0
DWORD DW#16#0 BYTE REAL B#16#0 0.000000e +000
11-14
Reference Manual Objects Element STATUS ALARM CNT_PULS RUN_TIM SPL SPS SEL SSW SIM_ON SBE Meaning Status word for test Alarm word for test Counted pulses Run-time in sec. Silo pilot running Silo pilot faulty Limit position fault Faulty silo Simulation ON Command ON to silo pilot Format DWORD WORD INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default W#16#0 W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Typ e O O O O O O O O O O Attr. U U HMI +
Silo pilot Permitted Values
11-15
Silo pilot
OS variables table
OS Variabl No.
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 START ST_CAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
Start Start Kalibrierlauf
Commandword
Start Start calibration run
Bit
I/O
16Bit OM OM Start Kalibr.
Value Range
S7 Par. Name
Designation German
Designation English
11-16
Event Text
Type
Unit
Silo pilot
VISU_OS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status for symbol and text SP in start position + ready to Pilot in Startposition, laufbereit run Pilot in Startposition + verriegelt SP in start position + interlocked Pilot in Startposition + Strung SP in start position + fault Pilot in Startposition + Strung SP in start position + fault not nicht QT acknowledged Pilot nicht in Startposition + SP not in start position + fault Strung Pilot nicht in Startposition + SP not in start position + fault Strung nicht QT not acknowledged Pilot luft SP running Vorort SP in local mode
Zustand fr Symbol und Text
S,O
Bitmap
11-17
Silo pilot
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 LOCAL SOE SVG RUN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Status
Betriebsart Vorot Silopilot in oberer Endlage Silopilot verriegelt Silopilot luft
Status
Local mode Pilot in start position (upper limit) Pilot interlocked Pilot is running
S,O
Bit
16Bit
SBE FAULT NQT MESS_OK
Start Silopilot Strung Letzte Messung ohne Fehler beendet
Start Silo pilot Fault Last measurement quit without fault
SQT BQU SPL SPS SEL SSW
11 12 13 14 Sequenz Test 15 Bad Quality 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Silopilot luft Silopilot gestrt Endlagenfehler Fehler Mewert
Sequence Test Bad Quality Silo pilot runs Silo pilot faulty Limit position fault Faulty silo value
SEVG SMUE SBRA SVOS SOEF SBFE REL_SIM REL_ANNU
Einschaltverriegelung Motorberlast Bandrissalarm Vorortschalter
Start interlock Drive overload Belt-break-alarm Local Switch Upper limit position of sensing Obere Endlage Fllgewicht weight Befehl Ein Start Freig. Simulation obere Endlage rel. simulation of upper limit Freigabe Betriebsmeldungen rel. operator annunciation
11-18
Silo pilot
AlarmWord
ALA_SMU ALA_SBA ALA_SVO ALA_SOE ALA_SLU ALA_SSP ALA_B06 ALA_START 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Motor berlast Bandriss Vorort Obere Endlage nicht verlassen Max Laufzeit berschritten Keine Startposition (nicht in Endlage) Start Maximal zulssige Laufzeit (sek) Maximale Pulse bei leerem Silo Pulwertigkeit Dimension Silo Fllstand Zeitpunkt der letzten gltigen Messung
Alarm
Motor overload Belt-break Local operation Upper limit position not left Time-out (upper limit not reached) Limit position fault (not in start position) start Max. permitted running time Max. pulses with empty silo Valency of one Pulse Dimension Silo level Time for last valid measurement D D D O O xxxxx xxxxx xxx.y xxxx.y Datum/Uhr
O ALF M ALF M ALF S ALF M ALF M ALF M OM I/O I/O I/O O 0-999 0-000 OM OM OM berlast Bandriss Vorort SOE SLU SSP Start
MAXR_TIM MAX_PULS PULS_VAL UNIT MV MSTIM_OS
real
11-19
Silo pilot
11-21
Counter
12 Counter
12 COUNTER
Description of C_COUNT Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Input interfaces Releases Process values Output interfaces Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Commands I/O-bar of C_COUNT OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 9
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\12_Cnt_e.doc
12-1
Counter
Description of C_COUNT
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_COUNT FB1015
Calling OBs
C_COUNT must be called in every cycle (e.g. OB35 (100MS_TASK)).
12-2
Counter
Function
With the pulse counter module C_COUNT one can acquire and summate pulses. It increments at each detected pulse +1. In addition there is the possibility to read values that have already been summated and to make them available for archiving.
Pulse acquisition: Parameter MODE_V = 0. For pulse acquisition one must call the module in a cyclic-interruptOB (e.g. the 100ms task). The input signals must be so structured that the pulse duration and the pulse pause are each longer than the cycle-time of the time-task.
t > cycle-time of time-task
t > cycle-time of time-task
Read summation value: Parameter MODE_V = 1. Parameter VAL_CNT must be connected with the summation value which is to be processed. An accumulated value can be accepted in two ways: A difference value is read and added to the existing old counter value. In this case, parameter NEW_VAL must have a 0-signal. After reading, the difference value is deleted in the source data area. A sum of pulses is read and overwrites the old counter value. Parameter NEW_VAL must be set to 1-signal to do this.
12-3
Counter
Operating principle
Input interfaces
CNZS Format Pointer The pulse signal which is to be acquired has to be connected to the interface CNZS. With each positive edge the pulse counter value is incremented by 1. Input for pulse signal Basic state 0-signal
REL_PULS
Release pulse acquisition
A release condition for pulse acquisition can be connected to interface REL_PULS. If a 0-signal is connected to REL_PULS, then no pulses are acquired.
MODE_V
Import pulse acquisition / import value
The MODE_V interface can be used to set whether the counter is to count pulses or import counter values. MODE_V = 0-signal indicates that the counter acquires pulses. MODE_V = 1-signal indicates that the counter imports a counter value.
NEW_VAL
New value overwrites old value
The NEW_VAL interface has significance only when the counter is used to import an accumulated value (not for pulse acquisition). When a 1-signal is applied, the old value is overwritten with the new counter value. For a 0-signal, the new value is added to the old value.
VAL_CNT Format ANY
Accumulated value
Default: 0
Interface to import the accumulated value. Type of data: Area: ATTENTION: WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT is allowed, DB, Memory otherwise ENG_ERR=1 otherwise ENG_ERR=2
When NEW_VAL=0 , the data-source will be deleted.
PULS_VAL Format REAL
Value of one pulse
Default: 1.0
This is the value of one pulse
Releases
There are currently no operational annunciations for the counter.
12-4
Counter
Process values
UNIT
Unit
Default: %
Format STRING (8 characters) Unit of the counter value.
Output interfaces
ENG_ERR 0 = no error 1 = wrong data type with parameter VAL_CNT, look to VAL_CNT 2 = wrong area of data with parameter VAL_CNT, look at VAL_CNT Engineering Error
Interfaces to OS
COMMAND Interface to OS Command word
Counted pulses * value for one pulse
Counted pulses * value for one pulse (refreshed every hour)
RT_MIS
Counted pulses (32 bit long)
prepared as interface to OS
RT_MIH
Counted pulses (refreshed every hour) (32 bit long)
12-5
Counter
The run sequence for the counter can be chosen as desired.
The C_COUNT has no Messages.
Commands
12-6
Counter
I/O-bar of C_COUNT
C_COUNT
Permitted Values
Element CNZS REL_PULS MODE_V NEW_VAL VAL_CNT PULS_VAL COMMAND UNIT
Meaning Input for pulse signal Release pulse acquisition Mode: 0 = Pulse / 1 = value New value overwrites old value Accumulated value Value of one pulse Command word Unit
Format POINTER BOOL BOOL BOOL ANY REAL WORD STRING [8] REAL REAL REAL DWORD DWORD BYTE
Default 0 1 0 0 DW#16#0 1.0 W#16#0 % 0.0 DW#16#0 DW#16#0 DW#16#0 DW#16#0 B#16'0
Type I I I I I I I I IO IO IO IO IO O
Attr.
HMI
+ I
RES_RTOS Reset time of the run-time RT_OS RT_H RT_MIS RT_MIH ENG_ERR counts for OS counts for OS refreshed every hour counts counts refresh every hour Engineering Error
+ + +
U U
+ +
12-7
Counter
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
PULS_VAL Command word

COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Pulswertigkeit
Value of one pulse
xx.yyy
Real
Command word
Command word
Bit
I/O
16 bit
R_RTOS
Zhler lschen
Delete counter
OM
RTOS
UNIT RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H RT_MIS RT_MIH
Dimension Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit Impulse fr OS Impulse fr OS Impulse fr MIS, aktualisiert alle 5s Impulse t fr MIS aktualisiert jede Stunde
Unit Reset time of the run-time Counts for OS Counts for OS Counts for MIS refreshed every 5s Counts for MIS Refreshed every hour
O D D D
Anw. Date/time xxxxx xxxxx h h
O O O O O O Date/time Real Real DWORD DWORD
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
12-9
Running time
13 Running time
13 RUNNING TIME
Description of C_RUNNT Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Input interfaces Release Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Commands I/O-bar of C_RUNNT OS variables table
1
2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 7
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\13_Rt_e.doc
13-1
Running time
Description of C_RUNNT
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_RUNNT FB1016
Calling OBs
C_RUNNT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
With the run-time module one can acquire running times and operating times.
13-2
Running time
Operating principle
Input interfaces
RTLS Input Basic state 0-signal If this interface has a 1-signal, then the running time is acquired.
REL_RT
Release
One can connect a release condition to interface REL_RT for the acquisition of the running time. With a 0-signal at REL_RT no running time is acquired.
Release
There are currently no operational annunciations for the running time module.
13-3
Running time
Interfaces to OS
COMMAND Interface to OS Command word
Reset time RT
Run-time for OS in hours
Run-time for OS in hours (refreshed every hour)
RT_MIS
Run-time in seconds (32-bit long)
RT_MIH
Run-time in seconds (32-bit long, refreshed every hour)
13-4
Running time
The run sequence for the run-time module can be chosen as desired.
The module uses the ALARM_8P module to generate annunciations. A plausibility and priority logic at the process level analyses all object faults only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically the fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely. The current operational state of the plant objects is automatically taken into consideration during the fault analysis, e.g. all fault annunciations are suppressed automatically for a stationary group no superfluous fault annunciations are created the operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations. Each fault annunciation is also classified. This shows whether an electrical or a mechanical fault, a process fault or a shut-down with a local safety switch applies. An electrician does not always need to be called first The production operator can give specific instructions.
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "true" annunciations. An annuciation release for each object means that the communication and OS are not overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure.
Commands
13-5
Running time
I/O-bar of C_RUNNT
C_RUNNT
Typ e I I I IO IO IO IO IO U U U U + + + + + + Permitted Values
Element RTLS REL_RT COMMAND
Meaning Input Release acquisition Command word
Format BOOL BOOL WORD
Default 0 1 W#16#0
Attr.
HMI
RES_RTOS Reset time of the run-time RT_OS RT_H RT_MIS RT_MIH Run-time in hours for OS Run-time in hours for OS Run-time in seconds Run-time in seconds Refresh every hour
DWORD DW#16#0 REAL REAL 0 0
DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0
13-6
Running time
OS variables table
S7-Par-Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
OS-Var.
Designation German
Designation English
Command word
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Command word
Command word
Bit
I/O
16 bit
R_RTOS
Zhler lschen
Delete counter
OM
RTOS
RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H RT_MIS RT_MIH
Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit Reset time of the run-time Betriebszeit in Std fr OS Run-time in hours. for OS Run-time in hours. for OS Betriebszeit in Std fr OS refreshed every hours Betriebszeit in sekunden Run-time in seconds Run-time in seconds Betriebszeit in sekunden Refresh every hour
D D D
Date/time xxxxx xxxxx
h h
O O O O O
Date/time REAL REAL Dword Dword
13-7
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
Technological Blocks
1.3
1.3.1 1.3.1.1
Measurement and Control

CTRL_PID: PID controller block CTRL_PID: Description
Object name (type + number)

FB 61
Function
CTRL_PID is a continuous PID control block used for setting up the following standard controller circuits: fixed setpoint controls, cascade controls (single / multiple cascades), ratio controls, synchro controls and proportional controls. In addition to its actual controller functions, block provides the following processing options: Modes: Manual mode, automatic or tracking Limit monitoring of the process variable and error signal as well as message generation via the ALARM8_P block. Disturbance variable input Setpoint tracking (SP=PV_IN) Setpoint value and process variable range setting (physical normalization) Setting the range of values for manipulated variables (physical normalizing) Dead band (on threshold) in the error signal branch Proportional, integral and derivative action, which can be enabled and disabled individually Proportional and derivative action in the feedback path. Operating point setting for P or PD controller mode
Calling OBs
The watchdog interrupt OB in which you install the block (for example OB32). It is also installed in OB100 (see startup characteristics).
1-6
Process Control System PCS 7 - Library A5E00180684-02
Operating principle
The block operates as (delayed derivative action) PID controller. Its step response is shown below, with integrator functions according to the trapezoid rule.
LMN LMN_HLM
GAIN * TV TM_LAG + SAMPLE_T/2 GAIN
GAIN
ER(t)*GAIN
t
LMN_LLM
TN 0 if t<0 1 if t>0
Input jump ER(t) = {
Note The input parameter LMNR_IN is displayed in the faceplate (loop display) as the manipulated variable. If there is no position feedback available from the process, you can interconnect the manipulated variable output LMN with LMNR_IN in CFC in order to display the manipulated variable in the loop display.
1-7
1.3.1.2
CTRL_PID: Signal processing in the setpoint and process variable branches
Setpoint generation
The setpoint SP can be obtained from three different sources, which are selected via the inputs SP_TRK_ON and SPEXTSEL_OP in accordance with the following table:
SP_TRK_ON 0 irrelevant 1 SPEXTSEL_OP 0 1 0 SP= State SP_OP Internal setpoint SP_EXT External setpoint PV_IN ** Tracked setpoint ** in manual mode only when SPBUMPON = 1
Internal setpoint
The internal setpoint SP_OP is controlled via OP_A_LIM or OP_A_RJC (range SP_LLM - SP_HLM).
External Setpoint
The external setpoint SP_EXT can be interconnected and is limited to the range (SPEXTLLM,SPEXTHLM). Changes in the internal or external setpoint are limited to a maximum gradient (SPDRLM, SPURLM), provided the setpoint ramp has been set (SPRAMPOF = 0).
Tracked setpoint
If SP_TRK_ON=1, the process variable PV_IN is used as the setpoint. tracking of the setpoint to the process variable is enabled only in manual mode (for internal setpoint and when SPBUMPON = 1), and is primarily used to provide an adequate setpoint when switching from manual to auto mode.
Error signal generation

Is based on the effective setpoint value SP and the process variable PV_IN and is available at the output ER after the dead band DEADB_W has expired.
ER
D EA DB _W
S P - P V _ IN
1-8
Error signal monitoring

The error signal ER is monitored for alarm limits (ERL_ALM, ERH_ALM) with a common hysteresis (ER_HYS). Results are displayed at the corresponding outputs (QERL_ALM, QERH_ALM).
Process variable monitoring

The process variable PV_IN is monitored for warning and alarm limits (PVL_ALM, PVL_WRN PVH_WRN, PVH_ALM) with a common hysteresis (HYS). Results are displayed at the corresponding outputs (QPVL_ALM, QPVL_WRN, QPVH_WRN, QPVH_ALM).
Physical normalization
The error signal ER is normalized from the physical measuring range of the process variable (NM_PVHR, NM_PVLR) to a percentage.
ERnormiert =
ER * 100 NM _ PVHR NM _ PVLR
After the PID algorithm has been executed, the manipulated variable is denormalized from a percentage value to the physical measuring range of the manipulated value (NM_LMNHR,NM_LMNLR).
LMN = NM_LMNLR +
LMN normiert * ( NM _ LMNHR NM _ LMNLR ) 100
Internal or external setpoints, process variables as well as the corresponding parameters are all entered in the physical measuring range of the process variable. The manual value, tracking value of the manipulated variable, feed forward control as well as the corresponding parameters are all entered in the physical measuring range of the manipulated variable. The controller GAIN is specified in normalized (dimensionless) format.
1-9
1.3.1.3
CTRL_PID: Generation of the manipulated variable

The manipulated variable LMN can be derived from three different sources, which are selected via the inputs LMN_SEL, LIOP_MAN_SEL, AUT_L and AUT_ON_OP as shown in the table below:
LMN_SEL LIOP_MAN_SE AUT_L AUT_ON_OP LMN= L 0 0 X 0 MAN_OP (is limited) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 X X X 0 0 1 X 0 1 X X X X MAN_OP (is limited) Calculated by PID algorithm MAN_OP (is limited) MAN_OP (is limited) Calculated by PID algorithm LMN_TRK
State Manual mode, set via the OS Manual mode, set via the OS Auto mode, via the OS Manual mode, set when AUT_L=0 Manual mode, set when AUT_L=0 Auto mode, set when AUT_L=1 Manipulated variable tracked
x = Any state
The changeover from manual to auto mode is carried out at the OS by setting the parameter AUT_ON_OP, if LIOP_MAN_SEL=0. The change from manual to auto is carried out by means of interconnection in the CFC by setting the parameter AUT_L, if LIOP_MAN_SEL=1. Tracking mode can be enabled only by means of an interconnection via the parameter LMN_SEL. Tracking takes priority over manual and auto mode. In auto mode, the normalized manipulated variable is generated according to the following algorithm:
1 TV * s LMN normiert = GAIN * 1 + TN * s + 1 + TM _ LAG * s * ERnormiert

and is subsequently denormalized. Also refer to: Complex number
Disturbance variable and limitation

In automatic mode, the disturbance variable DISV is added to the output of the PID algorithm. The result is limited to the range LMN_LLM to LMN_HLM.
1-10
1.3.1.4
CTRL_PID: Manual, automatic and tracking mode
Manual mode
The manipulated variable is set by the operator at OS via the input MAN_OP. It is operated and limited by means of OP_A_LIM or OP_A_RJC (range MAN_HLM MAN_LLM). The output values of QVHL and QVLL of OP_A_LIM or OP_A_RJC are passed to the outputs QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM.
Automatic mode
The PID algorithm calculates the manipulated variable. The control parameters GAIN, TN, TV and TM_LAG can not be interconnected by default. If they must be interconnected for exceptional applications such as gain scheduling, the corresponding system attribute s7_link must be modified. Note that parameter changes during automatic operation may cause to a surge of the manipulated variable. The controller direction of control can be reversed (rising error signal causes a falling manipulated variable) by setting a negative proportional GAIN. The proportional action can be disabled by setting P_SEL = 0, and the integral action by setting TN=0. If the manipulated variable LMN is limited for auto mode, the integrator is set to hold (anti-wind-up). The direction of action of the integrator is reversed by inverting the sign at parameter TN. Operating point (input LMN_OFF): Sets the operating point at the input LMN_OFF. In auto mode, this value replaces the disabled integral action of the PID algorithm. The operating point is entered in the measuring range of the manipulated variable. The derivative action is designed as a delaying derivative function. It can be disabled by setting TV=0. The direction of action of the differentiator is reversed by inverting the sign of the value at parameter TV. The delay constant TM_LAG should have a meaningful ratio to the derivative action time TV. This ratio is also referred to as the "derivative gain" (maximum of the unit step response of the derivative component). Its value usually lies within the range 5 < TV/TM_LAG < 10. Setting proportional action in feedback path: When PFDB_SEL = TRUE, the proportional action is set in the feedback. Hence, a control step does not affect the proportional action, so that overshoot can be reduced or avoided when the setpoint value changes, without changing the tracking characteristics. In auto mode, a reset at PFDB_SEL will cause an extremely high surge of the manipulated variables, i.e. the mode should be changed only in manual mode. Setting derivative action in feedback path: The derivative action is set in the feedback by setting DFDB_SEL = TRUE. A control step therefore does not affect the derivative action. The changeover of DFDB_SEL is not bumpless.
1-11
Tracking mode
In this state (LMN_SEL=1) the manipulated variable is fetched from the interconnected tracked value LMN_TRK and set at the output. The outputs QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM are set to FALSE. "Tracking" mode takes priority over all other modes, which means that this input can be used to configure an emergency-off circuit for the system.
Proportional and derivative action in the feedback path

Overshoot of the process variable after a setpoint step can be reduced or avoided by setting a P and D action in the feedback branch. In this mode, a setpoint step neither affects the P and D action nor does it trigger a step of the manipulated variable. Use PFDB_SEL=1 to set the P action and DFDB_SEL=1 to set the D action in the feedback circuit.
Cascading several PID controllers

The manipulated variable LMN of the master controller is connected to input SP_EXT of the slave controller. Also make sure the master controller is set to tracking mode when the cascade is cut. In such cases, the slave controller generates the signal QCAS_CUT, which is interconnected to the input LMN_SEL of the master controller. A cut can be caused by manual or tracking mode, by setpoint changes or manipulated variable tracking of the slave controller. QCAS_CUT= NOT( QMAN_AUT) OR LMN_SEL OR SP_TRK_ON OR NOT( QSPEXT_ON) The tracking input LMN_TRK of the master controller is interconnected to the output SP of the slave controller, in order to avoid jumps when the cascade is closed again. A directional lock of the integrator should be immediately triggered in the master controller when the slave controller reaches the limit of a manipulated variable. This is ensured by interconnecting (with controller operation in positive direction) input INT_HPOS or INT_HNEG of the master controller to the output QLMN_HLM or QLMN_LLM of the slave controller.
1-12
1.3.1.5
CTRL_PID: Changing operating modes
Change of the operating mode

Can be set either by means of operator control or via interconnected inputs.
External/Internal setpoint
The changeover is carried out by OS operation of the input SPEXTSEL_OP or by interconnection of SPEXON_L. You must set the corresponding enable inputs SPINT_EN, SPEXT_EN or the selection input LIOP_INT_SEL to enable the changeover. If SPBUMPON = 1, the effective setpoint is taken over to the internal setpoint in order to allow a bumpless changeover from external or tracking mode to internal mode.
Enabling the changeover of internal <-> external setpoint

LIO P_IN T_S EL FA LS E SP EX T_E N 1
0
Q S PE XTE N
FA LS E SP IN T_E N
1
0
Q S PIN TEN
QSPEXTEN = TRUE: QSPINTEN = TRUE:
SPEXTSEL_OP can be set from FALSE (internal setpoint) to TRUE (external setpoint). SPEXTSEL_OP can be reset from TRUE (external setpoint) to FALSE (internal setpoint).
SPEXTSEL_OP is tracked or reset as required.
Enabling setpoint control via the operator input

SP_OP_ON
Q_SP_OP = TRUE:
SP_OP can be set.
SP_OP is tracked or reset as required.
Manual/auto mode
The operator performs a changeover at the OS by setting input AUT_ON_OP or by interconnecting AUT_L. You must set the corresponding enable inputs MANOP_EN, AUTOP_EN or the selection input LIOP_MAN_SEL in order to enable this changeover.
1-13
Enabling the changeover manual <-> auto mode

AUT_ON_OP: LIOP_MAN_SEL 1
0
FALSE AUTOP_EN
QAUTOP
FALSE MANOP_EN
1
0
QMANOP
QAUTOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be set from FALSE (manual mode) to TRUE (automatic mode). QMANOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be reset from TRUE (automatic mode) to FALSE (manual mode). If appropriate, AUT_ON_OP is tracked or reset.
Enabling setpoint control via the operator input

OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC
LMNOP_O N
OP_EN
QOP_EN
QLMNOP
QLMNOP = TRUE: MAN_OP can be set. MAN_OP is tracked or reset as required. Special measures are taken for the modes listed below in order to ensure a bumpless changeover: External setpoint / Setpoint tracking: when SPBUMPON = TRUE, the internal setpoint SP_OP is set equal to the effective (external or tracked) setpoint. Auto mode: The manual value MAN_OP is tracked to the effective manipulated variable. Tracking mode: The manual value MAN_OP is tracked to the effective manipulated variable. Manual or tracking mode: The integrator is tracked to allow a bumpless changeover to auto mode. Integral component = manipulated variable (percentage) minus the proportional component minus the disturbance variable (percentage) Caution: When this formula is applied, the integrator may be loaded with extremely high numeric values if at the time of changeover the field value overshoots, i.e. an extremely high proportional component has developed. Additional measures have been implemented as of V6.0 to allow flexible limiting of the integral component. The derivative component is disabled and compensated.
1-14
1.3.1.6
CTRL_PID: Error handling
Error handling
The block algorithm handles the following events:
Operator control error

QOP_ERR = 1 is set if at least one operator error occurs during the operation of one of the parameters SPEXTSEL_OP, AUT_ON_OP, SP_OP or MAN_OP. Otherwise, QOP_ERR=0. An operator error is held only for the duration of one cycle. Parameter assignment error NM_PVHR <= NM_PVHR: The error signal ER is set to zero and ENO=0 or QERR=1. NM_LMNHR <= NM_LMNHR: In auto mode, the disturbance variable will be output and ENO=0 or QERR=1. Absolute value (TN) < SAMPLE_T/2: When TN > 0, the result of TN = SAMPLE_T/2 forms the calculation condition, and when TN < 0, TN = -SAMPLE_T/2 is used. When TN= 0, the integrator is disabled and the operating point LMN_OFF is set. Absolute value (TV) < SAMPLE_T: When TV > 0, the result of TV = SAMPLE_T forms the calculation condition, and when TV < 0, TN = -SAMPLE_T is used. When TV = 0, the differentiator is disabled. TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2: When TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2, TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2 is used for calculation. In these cases the derivative component behaves as an ideal differentiator.
1-15
1.3.1.7
CTRL_PID: Startup, time and message characteristics
Startup characteristics
During CPU startup, the internal setpoint of the CTRL_PID is set in manual mode. The block must be called from the startup OB accordingly. In CFC engineering this is handled by the CFC. Using the basic STEP 7 tools, you must enter the call in the startup OB. After startup, the messages will be suppressed for the duration of the cycles set in RUNUPCYC.
Time response
The block must be called in a watchdog interrupt OB. The sampling time of the block is entered in the parameter SAMPLE_T.
Assignment of the 32 bit status word VSTATUS

see CTRL_PID: VSTATUS
The CTRL_PID block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages. Messages are triggered by The functions monitoring the limits of process variables and the error signals, The CSF signal which is referenced as a control system error by interconnection. Messages triggered as a result of the violation of limits can be suppressed individually via the corresponding M_SUP_xx inputs. Process messages (not the system control messages!) can be completely locked by setting MSG_LOCK. QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not expired since the restart when MSG_LOCK = TRUE or MSG_STAT = 21. The table below lists message texts of the CTRL_PID block and their assignment to the block parameters.
1-16
Assignment of message texts and message class to the block parameters

Message Block No. parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 QPVH_ALM QPVH_WRN QPVL_WRN QPVL_ALM CSF QERH_ALM QERL_ALM Default message text PV:$$BlockComment$$ too high PV:$$BlockComment$$ high PV:$$BlockComment$$ low PV:$$BlockComment$$ too low External error ER:$$BlockComment$$ too high ER:$$BlockComment$$ too low Message class AH WH WL AL S AH AL Can be suppressed by M_SUP_AH, MSG_LOCK M_SUP_WH, MSG_LOCK M_SUP_WL, MSG_LOCK M_SUP_AL, MSG_LOCK M_SUP_ER, MSG_LOCK M_SUP_ER, MSG_LOCK
The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block are assigned SIMATIC BATCH data, the fourth is reserved for PV_IN, while the remaining value (AUX_PRx) can be set user-specific.
Assignment of auxiliary process values to the block parameters

Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Block parameter BA_NA STEP_NO BA_ID PV_IN AUX_PR05 AUX_PR06 AUX_PR07 AUX_PR08 AUX_PR09 AUX_PR010
Monitoring of process variables

n.a.
1.3.1.8
CTRL_PID: Block diagram

Note In order to print out the block diagram, select landscape format in the "Print" dialog box. The diagram is then printed on two pages, which you can join if required.
1-17
LIOP_INT_SEL SPEXON_L SPEXTSEL_OP
QSPEXTON
SP_TRK_ON SPBUMPON NOT QMAN_AUT LMN_SEL QSP_HLM QSP_LLM SPRAMPOF O R
A N D
0 SPEXTHLM SPEXTLLM
SP_EXT
1 SPURLM SPDRLM SAMPLE_T 1 0 QUPRLM QDNRLM V 1
OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC
0 SP_TRK_ON OR LINK_ON
PV_IN
SP
SP SP_OP
SP_HLM SP_LLM SPBUMPON
LINK_U U U_HL U_LL BTRACK
QVHL QVLL
QSP_HLM QSP_LLM
PFDB_SEL 1 P_SEL 1 0
ER
DEADB_W NM_PVHR NM_PVLR
0.0 0 TV TM_LAG SAMPLE_T
DFDB_SEL 1
phys %
0 TN INT_HPOS INT_HNEG SAMPLE_T 0
PV_IN
NM_PVHR NM_PVLR
GAIN
phys
PVH_ALM PVH_WRN PVL_WRN PVL_ALM HYS
-1
QPVH_ALM QPVH_WRN QPVL_WRN QPVL_ALM
NM_LMNHR NM_LMNLR
LMN_OFF
phys %
TN = 0
DISV
NM_LMNHR NM_LMNLR LMN_HLM LMN_LLM QLMN_HLM QLMN_LLM 1
LMN_SEL
% phys
LMN
LMN_TRK
LIOP_MAN_SEL AUT_L AUT_ON_OP 1 QMAN_AUT
OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC
LINK_ON V LINK_U
MAN_OP
MAN_HLM MAN_LLM TRUE
U U_HL U_LL BTRACK
QVHL QVLL
QMAN_HLM QMAN_LLM
1-18
1.3.1.9
I/O (parameter) AUT_L AUT_ON_ OP AUTOP_EN AUX_PRx BA_EN BA_ID BA_NA CSF DEADB_W DFDB_SEL DISV ER ER_HYS ERH_ALM ERL_ALM GAIN HYS INT_HNEG INT_HPOS LIOP_INT_ SEL LIOP_MAN _SEL LMN LMN_HLM LMN_LLM LMN_OFF LMN_SEL LMN_TRK LMNOP_ON LMNR_IN M_SUP_AH
CTRL_PID: I/Os
Meaning Data type BOOL BOOL BOOL ANY BOOL DWORD STRING [32] BOOL REAL BOOL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOL REAL BOOL REAL BOOL Default Type Attrib. OCM Valid values 0 0 1 0 0 0 '' 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 100 -100 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 I IO I IO I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I Q B Q Q Q Q Q Q + Q Q + + + + + + Q Q Q Q >= 0
> DEADBW <DEADBW
Interconnectable input for MAN/AUTO:0: Manual, 1: Auto Operator input: 0: Manual, 1: Auto 1: auto mode enabled Auxiliary process value x BATCH enabled Current batch number BATCH name Control system fault Dead band width Set D action in feedback (1 = enabled) Disturbance value Error signal Hysteresis for monitoring the error signal Error signal: High limit alarm Error signal: Low limit alarm Proportional gain Hysteresis 1 = freeze integral component (negative direction) 1 = freeze integral component (positive direction) 1: interconnection enabled 0: operator control enabled 1: interconnection active 0: operator input enabled Manipulated variable output High limit manipulated variable Low limit manipulated variable Operating point 1 = external manipulated variable enabled External manipulated variable 1 = enable operation of manipulated variable LMN_OP Position feedback for display on OS 1 = message suppression High limit alarm, process variable 1 = message suppression Low limit alarm, process variable Message suppression: error signal alarm
+ + +
>=0
>=0
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
+ + +
LMN_HLM > LMN_LLM LMN_LLM < LMN_HLM
M_SUP_AL M_SUP_ER
BOOL BOOL
0 1
I I
+ +
1-19
I/O (parameter) M_SUP_WH M_SUP_WL MAN_HLM MAN_LLM MAN_OP MANOP_EN MO_PVHR MO_PVLR MSG_ACK MSG_EVID MSG_LOCK MSG_STAT NM_LMNHR
Meaning
Data type BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL BOOL REAL REAL WORD DWORD BOOL WORD REAL
Default Type Attrib. OCM Valid values 0 0 100 0 0 1 110 -10 0 0 0 0 100 I I I I IO I I I O I I O I B Q + + + + + + +
NM_LMNLR
NM_PVHR
NM_PVLR
OCCUPIED OOS OPTI_EN P_SEL PFDB_SEL PV_IN PVH_ALM PVH_WRN PVL_ALM PVL_WRN Q_SP_OP QAUT_OP QC_LMN QC_LMN_I QC_LMNR_IN QC_PV_IN QCAS_CUT
1 = Message suppression: High warning, process variable 1 = Message suppression: Low warning, process variable High limit for manual manipulated variable Low limit for manual manipulated variable Operator input: Manipulated variable 1 = enable manual mode High limit of display (measurement range) Low limit of display (measurement range) Acknowledge messages Message number 1 = Process messages locked Error message status High limit: normalization of manipulated variable (measurement range) Low limit: normalization of manipulated variable (measurement range) High limit: normalization of process variable (measurement range) Low limit normalization of process variable (measurement range) Occupied by BATCH Reserve 1 = controller tuning ON, 0 = OFF 1 = set P component 1 = set P component in feedback Process value Process value: High limit alarm Process value: High warning Process value: Low limit alarm Process value: Low warning 1 = enable operator input of setpoint Status: 1=Operator may switch to "AUTO" Quality Code for LMN Quality Code for output LMN Quality Code for LMNR_IN Quality Code for PV_IN 1 = cascade is cut
M Q
REAL
REAL
100
REAL
BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOL BOOL BYTE BYTE BYTE BYTE BOOL
0 0 0 1 0 0 100 95 0 5 0 0 16#80 16#80 16#80 16#80 1
I I I I I IO I I I I O O O I I I O
+ + +
Q Q Q
+ + + + + + +
PVH_ALM > PVL_ALM PVH_WRN > PVL_WRN PVL_ALM < PVH_ALM PVL_WRN< PVH_WRN
1-20
I/O (parameter) QDNRLM QERH_ALM QERL_ALM QERR QLMN_HLM QLMN_LLM QLMNOP QMAN_AUT QMANOP QMSG_ERR QMSG_SUP QOP_ERR QPVH_ALM QPVH_WRN QPVL_ALM QPVL_WRN QSP_HLM QSP_LLM QSPEXTEN QSPEXTON QSPINTEN QUPRLM RUNUPCYC SAMPLE_T SP SP_EXT SP_HLM SP_LLM SP_OP SP_OP_ON SP_TRK_ON SPBUMPON SPDRLM SPEXON_L
Meaning
Data type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL INT REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL BOOL BOOL BOOL REAL BOOL
Default Type Attrib. OCM Valid values 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 1 100 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I I O I I I IO I I I I I Q B Q + + + + + + + + + +
1 = negative setpoint ramp limited Error signal: 1 = high limit alarm Error signal: 1 = low limit alarm 1 = error output (inverted ENO) 1 = limit high range of manipulated variable output 1 = limit low range of manipulated variable output Status: 1 = Operator may input manipulated value MAN_OP 0 = Manual, 1 = Auto 1 = enable manual mode 1 = message error 1 = message suppression 1 = group error message 1 = high limit alarm 1 = high warning 1 = low limit alarm 1 = low warning 1 = set high limit of setpoint output 1 = set low limit of setpoint output 1 = enable external setpoint 0 = Internal, 1 = External 1 = set internal setpoint 1 = set positive setpoint ramp limit Number of run-up cycles Sampling time in [s] Active setpoint External setpoint Setpoint high limit Setpoint low limit Operator input for setpoint Enable: 1 = Operator may input SP_OP 1 = track setpoint SP_OP 1 = bumpless setpoint max. negative setpoint ramp [1/s] Interconnectable input internal/external (0 = internal/1 = external) 1 = Enable operator to select external setpoint High limit of external setpoint Low limit of external setpoint
>=0.001 + Q + + +
SP_HLM > SP_LLM SP_LLM < SP_HLM
+ + +
SPEXT_EN SPEXTHLM SPEXTLLM
BOOL REAL REAL
1 100 0
I I I
Q Q Q
SPEXTHLM > SPEXTLLM SPEXTLLM < SPEXTHLM
1-21
I/O (parameter)
Meaning
Data type BOOL
Default Type Attrib. OCM Valid values 0 IO B +
SPEXTSEL_OP Mode: 0 = internal 1 = external SPINT_EN 1 = Enable operator to select internal setpoint SPRAMPOF 1 = setpoint ramp limiting OFF SPURLM max. positive setpoint of ramp rate [1/s] STEP_NO BATCH step number TM_LAG Time lag of D action in [s] TN Tracking time in [s]
BOOL BOOL REAL
1 1 100
I I I I I I
Q + + Q + + +
DWORD 0 REAL 1 REAL 10
SAMPLE_ T/2 TN=0, SAMPLE_ T/2 TV=0, SAMPLE_ T
TV
Derivative time in [s]
REAL
USTATUS VSTATUS
Status word in VSTATUS, can be set user-specific
WORD
I O
Extended status display in block DWORD 0 icons
For information on abbreviations used refer to: General information on the block description
1.3.1.10
CTRL_PID: VSTATUS
The 32-bit status word extends the status display in the block icons and faceplates. The 16 low bits (bit 0 - 15) are used by the block as follows:
Bit no.: Parameter Bit no.: Parameter
7 15 OOS
6 14
5 13
QSPEXTON QMAN_AUT MSG_LOCK BA_EN OCCUPIED 12 11 10 9 8 -
QMSG_SUP
LMN_SEL
The 16-bit input USTATUS (data type WORD) uses the high bits (bit 16 - 31). The user can use these freely.
1-22
1.3.1.11 Bedienen und Beobachten

Standardview
All analog displays are created by means of the "AdvancedAnalogDisplay". The number format is set via the block icon ("Format_InputValue" and "Format_OutputValue" properties). The View has 2 "Permission" as objects for the input of setpoints and manipulated variables, since operator authorizations for these variables depend upon various factors The "Permission_Setpoint" object evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the "Q_SP_OP = TRUE" parameter.. The "Permission_Manual" object evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the "QLMNOP = TRUE" parameter. The PID tuner is operated in the parameter view (Tuning On/Off). When tuning is active, all other operations of the controller are locked .
Order and assignment of direct connections to operator controlled objects

@Level5 btAuto btManual btExtern btIntern Permission_Setpoint Permission_Manual Permission_Setpoint Setpoint_AnalogValue Permission_Manual Manual_AnalogValue Format Setpoint_AnalogValue ProcessValue_AnalogValue Format Manual_AnalogValue Output_AnalogValue
Authorization Authorization Authorization Authorization Operator control enable Level_Source Level_Target Level_Source Target_ Operator control enable Operator control enable Target_ Operator control enable Operator control enable Format_InputValue Format Format Format_OutputValue Format Format
ParameterView
The objects "Permission_SP_Bumpless", "Permission_Gain" and "Permission_AlarmHigh_AnalogValue" evaluates the WinCC authorization levels, as well as the "OPTI_EN = FALSE" parameter. The process value "Error signal_AnalogValue" is set via the "AdvancedAnalogDisplay", the number format is set via the block icon ("Format_InputValue" property). All other analog displays show the conventional "Floating-point format" I/O field. This setpoint bar graph shows the setpoint control limits, with reference to the bar graph limits.
Reihenfolge und Rangierung von Direktverbindungen auf die bedienbaren Objekte

@Level6 Permission_SP_Bumpless Permission_SP_Bumpless Bumbless_CHECKBOX_L SP_TRK_ON_CHECKBOX_L SPRAMP_OFF_CHECKBOX_L SPHighLimit_AnalogValue SPLowLimit_AnalogValue ManHighLimit_AnalogValue ManLowLimit_AnalogValue SPURLM_AnalogValue SPDRLM_AnalogValue MO_PVHR_AnalogValue MO_PVLR_AnalogValue Permission_SP_Bumpless SPHighLimit_AnalogValue SPLowLimit_AnalogValue ManHighLimit_AnalogValue ManLowLimit_AnalogValue SPURLM_AnalogValue SPDRLM_AnalogValue MO_PVHR_AnalogValue MO_PVLR_AnalogValue Operator control enable Level_Source Target_ Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Target_ BackgroundColor Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value
14-2
Reference Manual Objects @Level6 Permission_Gain OPTI_EN_CHECKBOX_L Permission_Gain Gain_AnalogValue TN_AnalogValue TV_AnalogValue DEADB_W_AnalogValue TM_LAG_AnalogValue ERH_ALM_AnalogValue ERL_ALM_AnalogValue ER_HYS_AnalogValue3 M_SUP_ER_CHECKBOX_L Permission_Gain Gain_AnalogValue TN_AnalogValue TV_AnalogValue DEADB_W_AnalogValue TM_LAG_AnalogValue ERH_ALM_AnalogValue ERL_ALM_AnalogValue ER_HYS_AnalogValue3 Format Manual_AnalogValue Output_AnalogValue Regeldifferenz_AnalogValuem Operator control enable Level_Source Operator control enable Target_ Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Operator control enable Target_ BackgroundColor Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Background color value Format_InputValue Format Format Format
Diagnosis View
Diagnosis view shows in addition the Interface description and-status . The Parametervalues are not changeable.
14-4
Alarmview
The PID Controller-related Operation and alarm reports are shown in the Alarmview.
Informationview
Description of the Informationview see Systemdescription CEMAT.
14-6
16 Adapter
16 ADAPTER
Description from C_ADAPT Typ/Nummer Calling OBs Function Operation principle Input interfaces Links Output interfaces Adaptations in the OS Non CEMAT block with status word Edit CFG file Time behavior Signal behavior Commands Display E/A-Bar from C_ADAPT
1
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 5 6 6 7 10 10 10 10 11
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 15.09.2004 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\16_ADAPT_e.doc
Adapter
Description from C_ADAPT

Typ/Nummer
Module name: Module number: C_ADAPT FC1018
Calling OBs
C_ADAPT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK)
Function
The C_ADAPT can connect non-CEMAT modules to CEMAT groups and routes. In the case of faults of the non-CEMAT module, this is also displayed on the collective display for group / route. When a status call is made, the TAG and the module comment from the non-CEMAT modules are displayed in the status messages window.
Operation principle
Input interfaces
FAULT Pointer Initial state 0-signal This input must be connected with an output of the non-CEMAT module. The output of the nonCEMAT module must have the 1-signal for a fault. NOTE: Only FBs with an instance-DB can be interconnected.
FT_NACK
Fault not acknowledged
Initial state 0-signal
When the non-CEMAT module has an output that indicates 1-signal for a non-acknowledged fault, you can connect this output with FT_NACK. For 1-signal at FT_NACK, a red flashing light indicates a started group / route.
AMZS
Fault locking for the group
Initial state 0-signal
A 1-signal on EMZS locks the display of the fault on the group fault lamp (red). Typical application Refer to C_DRV_1D EMZS interface.
16-2
Links
The failure of the drive is represented as a collective fault in the status display of the associated group / route. The Status Call function for group or route displays the fault details. To ensure this function, each drive must at least be interconnected with a route or group to which it belongs with regard to signaling.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the drive must be connected with the R_LINK interface of the route or the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
If the drive belongs to more than two routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be connected upstream. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and an output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive. Note: Under no circumstances can the MUX_IN interface be used for the direct interconnection with group or route. It is used exclusively for interconnection with the MUX module.
Adapter
Example: Non-CEMAT module using C_ADAPT assigned to a CEMAT route module.
16-4
Output interfaces
P_ERROR Parameterization error The FAULT input must be connected with an output signal of the non-CEMAT module. The nonCEMAT module must be a FB that has an instance DB. No inputs, outputs or flags may be switched to the FAULT input, otherwise P_ERROR indicates -1.
INST_DB
Instance DB of the non-CEMAT module
You may only switch signals to the FAULT input from FBs that have an instance DB. The C_ADAPT cannot recognize when you interconnect an FC. To allow you in the case of any problems to test whether the correct module has been interconnected, the C_ADAPT displays the number of the instance DB.
Adapter
Adaptations in the OS
No additional parameterization is necessary to permit the display of "non-CEMAT" modules in the group "status-call" and in the "object-list". In this case, only the plant identifier and the comment are displayed (no fault type). But the "non-CEMAT" module must have the attributes parameter must have the attribute S7_m_c = true. S7_m_c = true. And at least one
Non CEMAT block with status word

When a non CEMAT block has a status word with defined bits the group status-call can display several faults in detail and the object list can display the status of the block with several colour (white = not running, green =running, red = fault).
To get this feature you have to increase the config file C_Config.cfg and you have to provide a new config file for each non CEMAT block. The status word of the block must have the attribute S7_m_c = true.
16-6
Edit CFG file

After installing CEMAT at your PC an example of a non CEMAT block is provided. You will find this d:\CEM_V6\CONFIG. The symbol of the block is "SIM_ADAP3 the parameter name of the status word is " STA_MAR". The common config file C_CONFIG.cfg is already extended with the symbol name and you will find a SIM_ADAP3_009.cfg for English version and a SIM_ADAP3_007.cfg for German version. Pleas e open the C_CONFIG.cfg. You will find below CEMAT unknown Objects the line for "SIM_ADAP3".
;unknown Objects ;Objectname=Filename without language code and without extension .cfg SIM_ADAP3=SIM_ADAP3
On the left there is the symbol name on the right the name of the config file. Take for the config file the same name like for the symbol ! For each non CEMAT module such a line is required in the C_CONFIG.cfg.
Adapter
Config file for the non CEMAT block One has to define the bits for running and fault. To get the faults in detail you have to define for each fault the bit. The following table describes the bits of the status word
Bit No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 fault 1 fault 2 fault 3 fault 4 discription running General fault Bit No. in Config file 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ATTENTION: The low and high byte between S7 und OS is changed. The counting of bits in the config file does not start with 0 but with 1. Be careful.
Example: General fault = Bit 10 in the config file
16-8
Example of SIM_ADAP3_007.cfg:
; This is an example file for an SIMATIC block of an subcontractor to show this object in the CEMAT Group/Route-Status
[Control] ; The name of the variable, which is an equivalent ; to the CEMAT Status variable StatusVariableName=STA_MAR (parameter name for status word)
[Run] ; This section is only for the Group Instance List (GRINZ) ; Bit (1-16) from StatusVariableName for Status Run RunBit=9 ; Bit (1-16) from StatusVariableName for Status Fault FaultBit=10
[Fault] ;Visible, Attribut,Comment,Bit,Fault Class 1,FT1, fault text 1,1,M 1,FT2, fault text 2,2,E 1,FT3, fault text 3,3,P 1,FT4, fault text 4,4,M ;End of List
ATTENTION: Do not delete this line ";End of List"
Adapter
Time behavior
The ADAPT module and the non-CEMAT module must be called before the associated route or group. Any called C_MUX modules must run prior to this module.
Signal behavior
The module does not issue any messages.
Commands
There are no commands.
Display
No user interface
16-10
E/A-Bar from C_ADAPT

C_ADAPT
Permitted Values 0/1 0/1 0/1
Element FAULT FT_NACK AMZS GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK P_ERROR INST_DB
Meaning Static Fault Fault not acknowledged Fault interlock to group Associated group/route Associated group/route For several routes/groups Parameter fault Instanz-DB from not CEMAT Module
Format POINTER BOOL BOOL INT INT INT INT INT
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Typ I I I I I I O O
Attr.
HMI
Reference Manual for Objects
17 Measured Value Integrator
17 MEASURED VALUE INTEGRATOR

Description of C_MEAS_I Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating Principle Input interfaces Releases Process values Interfaces to the OS Time Characteristics Message characteristics Commands /O-bar of C_MEAS_I
1
2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 26.02.2003 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\17_MEAS_I_e.doc
Measured Value Integrator
Description of C_MEAS_I
Type/Number
Function block name: C_MEAS_I Function block number: FC1026
Calling OBs
The C_MEAS_I must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
This function block (FB) integrates a measured value and forms the interface. First the measured value is normalized (0% = 0 and 100% = 4095). The time grid of the integration is 60 seconds. If the connected measured value is 100%, then the result of the integration after 60 seconds is 4095, after 120 seconds 8190, after 180 seconds 12285 etc. The FB has 2 outputs for integration values. Integration value 1 is updated every 5 seconds. Integration value 2 is updated every hour. These values are not reset by the FB but continue to run. CEMAT MIS can evaluate the result of the integration. For recalculation to physical values, MIS uses the scaling parameters SCB and SCE and the dimensioning factor PULS_VAL. An integration corresponds to the multiplication of the measured value dimension with a time unit. If this time unit is 1 hour (e.g. kW -> kWh or t/h -> t), PULS_VAL must have the value 1. In all other cases, PULS_VAL must have the ratio of 1 hour to the time unit of the measured value. Example: Measured value = l / s, integration value should be l: PULS_VAL = 1h / 1s = 3600s / 1 s = 3600 A conversion of the measured value to physical units of the same value can also be carried out via PULS_VAL. Example: Measured value = l / h, integration value should be hl: PULS_VAL = 1 l / 1 hl = 1 / 100. Measured value = kg / s, integration value should be t: PULS_VAL = (1 h / 1 s) * (1 kg / 1 t) = 3600 * (1 / 1000) = 3.6.
17-2
Operating Principle
Input interfaces
MV_IN REAL format Input for a physical measured value. Can be connected to the MV output of C_MEASURE. Measured value Initial state 0
QC BYTE format
Quality Code from C_MEASURE
Initial state 80H
Transfer of the Quality Code from the upstream measured value FB. Can be connected to the QC of C_MEASURE.
SCB REAL format
Start of scale
Default: 0.0
Physical value (start of measuring range). Can be connected to the SCB_OUT output of C_MEASURE.
SCE REAL format
End of scale
Default: 100.0
Physical value (end of measuring range). Can be connected to the SCE_OUT output of C_MEASURE.
PULS_VAL REAL format
Dimensioning factor
Default: 1.0
Factor for the weighting of the integration time / dimensions conversion; see Function.
Releases
REL_INT Integrator release Initial state 1 signal The integrate function is released with the 1 signal at the REL_INT interface.
Process values
The process values can be set during configuration and can be changed from the control room. The process values should not be switched in the CFC, as they cannot then be operated from the faceplates.
UNIT
Dimension
Default: %
STRING format (8 characters) Dimension of the count value.
RT_MIS Interface to MIS Integration value (update every 5 seconds)
RT_MIH Interface to MIS
Integration value (update every hour)
MIH_OK
Integration value MIH has no invalid values
Interface to MIS. There were no invalid measured values during the past hour with the 1 signal at MIH_OK.
17-4
Time Characteristics
None
The FB has no messages.
Commands
There are no commands.
/O-bar of C_MEAS_I
C_MEAS_I
Permissible values
Element MV_IN QC SCB SCE RT_MIS RT_MIH MIH_OK PULS_VAL UNIT
Meaning Measured value Quality code Start of scale End of scale Integration value 1 (5 s update) Integration value 2 (hourly update) Integration value 2 OK Dimensioning factor Unit
Type REAL BYTE REAL REAL DINT DINT BOOL REAL STRING [8]
Default 0 80H 0 100.0 0 0 1 1.0 %
Type Attr. I I I I O O O I I
HMI
+ +
17-6
18 Bi-directional Drive
18 BI-DIRECTIONAL DRIVE
Description of C_DRV_2D Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Hardware outputs Interfaces to the OS Time characteristics Annunciation characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_DRV_2D OS variables table
1
2 2 2 3 4 4 6 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 21 22 22 23 27
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\18_Drv_2D_e.doc
0-1
Description of C_DRV_2D
Type/Number
Main module: Module name: Module no.: C_DRV_2D FB1003
Calling OBs
C_DRV_2D must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
0-2
Function
With the bi-directional drive one can control, monitor and visualize the operation of drives. The module monitors as per standard the feedback ERM1 and ERM2 in conjunction with contactor output EBE1 and EBE2, electrical availability ESB, overload EBM, the position of the local switch in automatic operation EVO and a speed monitor signal. In the event of a fault the module switches off the drive. The drive block offers two alternatives for the supervision of a speed monitor signal: A steady 1Signal or Pulses (software speed monitor). The pulse evaluation is built in the drive block itself. For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this block with the CEMAT-adapter-block "C_SIMO_A", which communicates with the SIMOCODE basic-unit.
Alarm messages: In the event of a fault the bi-directional drive generates an alarm message. Additional protection signals like e.g. pull-rope or belt drift switch of conveyor belts, bearing temperature etc. also switch off the drive but they cannot be analysed in detail by the drive module. One must program an annunciation module for each protection signal in order to display the alarm message on the screen.
Visualization: All drive conditions are evaluated and supplied for visualization on OS. The CEMAT Standard for OS provides block icons for status display (running, off, faulty, operating mode) as well as faceplates for the display of more detailed information.
Operating modes: The drive module has 3 types of operating modes: Automatic mode (Start/Stop is done through the associated group) Single-start mode (Start/Stop for each drive separately is possible via the OS) Local mode via the PLC (Start/Stop with local switch) The operating modes are changed by the associated group. The group module generates a release signal for the respective operating mode. This signal must be connected to the appropriate operating mode release interface of the drive module.
Sequence Test: In Sequence Test mode the motor can be started without hardware signals. The feedback of the contactor and eventually a speed monitor are simulated. The hardware signals (ESB; EBM; EVO) are still active and have to be forced by a test program at the beginning of the OB1Task. If driver blocks are used, the Output SIM_ON of the drive can be connected to input SIM_ON of each driver block to enable the simulation.
0-3
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
ERM1 Feedback ON direction 1 Basic state 0-Signal The ERM1 parameter must be connected. It is appropriate to use the feedback contact of the main contactor 1 for this purpose. The feedback is monitored in automatic mode and in the single-start mode. The monitoring time for switching on/off the motor can be set with the parameter FEEDBTIM. An alarm is issued if no feedback occurs and/or the monitoring time expires.
ERM2 See ERM1
Feedback ON direction 2
ESB
The ESB parameter is used to monitor the electrical availability of the motor. The electrical availability is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EBM
Overload
The EBM parameter is used to monitor the overload of the motor. The overload is monitored in automatic mode and in single-start mode, and results in a shutdown with an alarm.
EVO
Local switch
The EVO parameter is used for the connection with the local switch of the motor. EVO = 1signal means automatic position and EVO = 0-signal means local position. No alarm signal occurs in the control room in local mode. In position Local (EVO = 0-signal) the motor can be started and stopped via ESR1/ESR2 and ESP.
ESP
Local stop
The ESP parameter is used to stop the motor in local mode. This is a break contact, i.e. the 0signal stops the motor. By default the local stop ESP is only active if the drive is in local mode. Connecting a 1-signal to LST_ACT, the local stop is always effective.
ESR1
A positive edge to the parameter ESR1 starts the motor in direction 1. Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface = 1-signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal). Caution: The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM1 contactor feedback message arrives. For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.
0-4
ESR2
A positive edge to the parameter ESR2 starts the motor in direction 2. Prerequisite for the local start of the motor is the local release (interface ELOC interface = 1-signal) and the EVO switch positioned to Local (EVO = 0-signal). Caution: The local start pushbutton must remain pressed until the ERM2 contactor feedback message arrives. For safety reasons, the signal is not stored.
0-5
Input interfaces
EEVG1 Start interlock direction 1 Basic state 1-Signal The drive can be started in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the start interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EEVG1 prevents the start. In local mode the starting interlock is not effective. Typical application: The fan can be started only with closed fan damper. For this, the interface EEVG1must be connected with the signal KVS1 of the damper. The run signal of the fan must be connected to the inching release of the damper, i.e. as soon as the fan is operating, the damper can be opened or positioned. The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to damper direction 1 and to the fan drive. As soon as the damper has reached limit position 1 the start interlock of the fan drive has 1-signal and the fan drive is also switched on.
EEVG2 Look at EEVG1
Start interlock direction 2
EBVG1
The drive can run in automatic mode or single-start mode only if the operating interlock has 1signal. 0-signal at interface EBVG1 prevents the start or switches off the running drive. In local mode the operating interlock is not effective. Typical application: Material transport: Only if the upstream drive is running may the following drive be started. As soon as the upstream drive fails the following drive must stop as well. For this, interface EBVG1 must be connected with run-signal EVS of the upstream drive. The start command of group GBE goes simultaneously to both drives. As soon as the upstream drive is running the operating interlock of the following drive has 1-signal and this drive is also started.
EBVG2 Look at EBVG1
0-6
ESVG
Protection interlock (always effective)
All signals which indicate a drive fault and which are not monitored by the drive module as per standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status healthy, 0-signal means faulty. Interface ESVG is effective for all operating modes of the drive. Caution: When the drive is switched off via ESVG the drive module does not generate an alarm message. For the fault message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protective interlock one must use the output MAU of the appropriate annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
Typical application: All suppressor circuits concerning operator and machine safety and which therefore must be effective all the time (e.g. pull-rope).
ESVA
Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Basic state 1-signal
All signals which indicate a drive fault and which are not monitored by the drive module as per standard must be connected to the protection interlock of the drive. A 1-signal means status OK, 0-signal means faulty. Interface ESVA is effective only in automatic mode and single-start mode, i.e. in the case of a fault the drive can still be operated in local mode. Caution: When the drive is switched off via ESVA the drive module does not generate an alarm message. For the alarm message one must program an annunciation module. To connect the protective interlock one must use the output MAU of the appropriate annunciation module and not the input signal of the fault so that a possible time delay is taken into consideration.
Typical application: Belt drift switch: If the belt drift switch responds this means in automatic mode a drive fault. However, it must be possible to start the drive in local mode to align the belt.
ESPO
Sporadic ON/OFF
0-Signal at interface ESPO stops the motor without resetting of the command memory EKS. The motor is still activated and restarts automatically with 1-Signal at this interface. To stop the motor completely 1-Signal at EBFA or 0-Signal at EBVG is required. If the motor is stopped by a fault, it must be restarted through the associated group. This interface does not work in local mode. Typical application: A pump which is started and stopped depending on a pressure signal.
0-7
EDRW
Hardware speed monitor
If a continuous 1-signal is available for speed monitor supervision the speed monitor signal must be connected to interface EDRW. At the same time the software speed monitor must be disabled (REL_SSM = 0-signal) A 1-signal at interface EDRW means that the motor is running and the Speed monitor has responded. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does not provide a continuous 1-signal within the default time, the drive module generates an alarm message. The speed monitor supervision is only effective in automatic mode and in single-start mode.
SW_SPEED
Pulse signal software speed monitor
If you get pulses from the speed monitor, the pulse input must be connected to interface SW_SPEED. The software speed monitor function must be enabled via REL_SSM = 1-Signal. The Speed monitoring time can be set (process value SPEEDTIM). If the Speed monitor does not provide pulses within the default time (considering the tolerance value TOL_SSM), the drive module generates an alarm message. Input-signal for software speed monitor. The speed monitor supervision is only effective in automatic mode and in single-start mode. Make sure that the duration of the pulses is long enough. If the OB1 cycle time is 100ms, pulses and pause should be at least 200ms.
ELOC
Local mode release
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the drive for the local mode through the PLC, i.e. the drive can be started/stopped via inputs ESR and ESP. The operating mode is changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets in local mode signal GLO. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting interface ELOC with signal GLO of the appropriate group. In local mode operation via the PLC only the protective interlock ESVG is effective. The connection of interfaces EEVG, EBVG and ESVA is not analysed in local mode. In local mode no logic signal EVS is generated!
EEIZ
A 1-Signal at this interface releases the single-start mode for the drive, i.e. the drive can be started and stopped separately from the central control room. The operating modes are changed by the appropriate group. The group module sets the single-start mode signal GES. This information is passed on to the drive module by connecting the interface EEIZ with signal GES of the appropriate group. In single-start mode all interlocks of the drive are effective! Start is carried out after the set horn time (process value HORN_TIM) has expired.
ESTB
Stand-by mode
In the philosophy of CEMAT-Standards only the active plant sections can generate alarm messages. This means, if a drive at stop is faulty this is indicated in the symbol at the flow mimic but there will be no alarm message. A 1-Signal at interface ESTB means that the drive is in stand-by mode. In this mode the drive is monitored for availability even under stand still conditions. If a fault occurs when the drive is in stand-by mode, an alarm message is generated.
0-8
ETFG
Inching release
Interface ETFG must be connected with LOG1 if the drive is to be operated as a positioning drive, i.e. it is to be switched ON and OFF in short intervals (<= 2s).
EMFR
With 0-signal at this interface the annunciation function is blocked. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To prevent this one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This causes no alarms to be generated. The cause of "control voltage failure" is generated by an annunciation module which has to be engineered for this purpose.
EMZS
A 1-signal on EMZS prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. In the status call the drive fault can still be seen. Typical application: To interlock a main drive together with the affiliated auxiliary drive one must connect the feedback contact ERM and the ON command EBE of the auxiliary drive to the protective interlock of the main drive and vice versa. In this case, the group would indicate a fault as soon as one of the two drives is running. To prevent this one must connect ERM and EBE of the auxiliary drive together with OR to interface EMZS of the main drive.
ELPZ
If one has several control desks with lamps and wants to test the lamps for each control desk separately, one can connect the corresponding lamp test signal to this interface. Caution: Using ELPZ the lamp test interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
EQIT
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding control desk signal (pulse) has to be connected to this interface. Caution: Using EQIT the acknowledgement interface at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
0-9
EBFE1
Command ON direction 1
Interface to start the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is started in direction 1. The interface is normally connected through the GBE signal of the associated group(s) or the WBE signal of the associated route(s). The drive is started either immediately or delayed according to the set start delay time (process value STARTDEL). Caution: Interface EBFE1 should not be connected with a continuous signal as a drive fault can then not be acknowledged! If a continuous signal is required, one must take care that the EBFE1 has signal zero when there is a fault.
EBFE2 See EBFE1
EBFA
Command OFF
Interface to switch off the drive in automatic mode. With 1-signal the drive is switched off. The interface is normally connected through the negated GDE signal of the associated group(s) or through the negated WDE signal of the associated route(s). The drive is switched off either immediately or delayed according to the set stop delay time (process value STOPDEL).
QSTP
Quick stop
In some situations it may be necessary to stop the drives of a group instantaneously (without stop delay). The connection of interface QSTP with 1-signal results in the immediate stopping of the drive in automatic mode (interface EBFA may have a delaying effect). The group module sets during quick stop the signal GQS. Interface QSTP of the drives must be connected with this signal. Typical application: During ship loading, when a chamber of the ship is fully loaded, the ship moves slightly and loading continues immediately. For this, one stops the group with this function immediately (no stop delay), and restarts immediately and the already loaded belts continue to convey.
DSIG_BQ
This interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status of the I/O Cards. This is possible when driver blocks are used. Connected all QBAD-signals from the drivers to an OR-function. The output of this OR-function connected to DSIG_BQ. The status is shown on the faceplate in case of any Bad Quality
STAT_SC Format BYTE
Status SIMOCODE
For drives with SIMOCODE you have to connect this parameter with out-parameter STAT_SC of the Adapter block "C_SIMO_A". Additional you have to enable this function with 1-signal at parameter "REL_SC".
0-10
MV_PERC Format Integer
Motor current via C_MEASURE
If a measure block for the motor current exists or a SIMOCODE is used, the percentage value of the motor current can be displayed on the faceplate of the motor. Therefore the output MV_PERC of C_MEASUR or the output I_PERC of C_SIMO_A has to be connected to this interface. Additionally the function must be enabled via REL_MVC or REL_SC. Caution: In case of a measuring value the upper limit 1 of the measure corresponds to 100% value of motor current. In the bar of the drive faceplate 0-130% are displayed.
STA2_B10
0-11
Releases
REL_SSM Release software speed monitor Basic state 0-signal REL_SSM must be connected with a 1-signal if you wish to use the function of the software speed monitor. The EDRW interface is then no longer evaluated. The 0-signal causes monitoring of the EDRW interface. This interfaces is not operable through OS.
SM_EVS_I
EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-signal
With 0-signal at SM_EVS_I, the EVS gets 1-signal after the speed monitor has got 1-signal and supervision time of the monitor has elapsed. With 1-signal at SM_EVS_I, the EVS gets 1-signal immediately with the 1-signal of the speed monitor.
REL_EBD
Bypass Speed Monitor
The Speed Monitor can be enabled/disabled from the Diagnostic Picture from the OS only. When the Bypass is set no supervision of speed monitor is active. Caution: This is no block parameter
REL_MVC
Enable display of motor current
1-signal at this parameter enables the display of motor current in the faceplate and at the same time an additional button appears in order to open the measure faceplate itself. Look also to parameter "MV_PERC"
NSTP_L_A
No stop after switching local
auto
This parameter is foreseen for different project-standards. 1-signal at this parameter causes no stop for running drives after switchover from local mode into automatic mode, if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled..
LST_ACT
Local Stop active
With 0-signal at this parameter the local-stop is not effective in automatic mode. 1-signal at this parameter enables the local stop in automatic mode too, and an alarm will be created.
REL_SC
Enable SIMOCODE
0-12
Links
The fault of the drive is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every drive must be connected with at least one route or a group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
GR_LINK2
MUX_LINK
If the drive belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection with the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection with the MUX_LINK interface of the drive. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for connection with a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection with another MUX module.
0-13
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution:
Check the runtime sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the drive. For the other modules the run sequence is as follows: first the drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
0-14
Process values
The process values can be set during engineering and they can be changed online from the control room. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be connected in the CFC.
FEEDBTIM
Feedback time
Default: 4
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. The time for the feedback monitoring is preset as per standard to 4 seconds. If this time is not sufficient, e.g. with motors with star-delta starting, then the set time must be extended correspondingly. The longer time is only valid during the start, for stopping it is still the standard monitoring time of about 4s.
STARTDEL
Start delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. In automatic mode the start of the drive is delayed by the set time (staggered starting). In singlestart mode and in local mode this time delay is not effective!
STOPDEL
Stop delay
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 9999) Value in seconds. The stopping of the drive via interface EBFA is delayed by the set time.
SPEEDTIM
Speed monitor monitoring time
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. Within the set time the interface for the speed monitor EDRW must have 1-signal. When this time is exceeded, the drive generates a speed monitor fault. Caution: The EVS signal becomes "1" only after this time has elapsed. Therefore this value must be made "0" when no speed monitor is required. Otherwise there will be an unnecessary delay in the starting of the subsequent drives. With SM_EVS_I=1 the EVS-signal becomes 1-signal immediately with speed monitor signal.
HORN_TIM
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During the start of the drive in single-start mode a horn bit (module output HORN) is set for the duration of the set time and the start of the drive is delayed. The horn bit can be connected to trigger a start-up warning.
0-15
CHMONTIM
Monitoring change direction
Default: 10
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds When the motor is running (EBE1 or EBE2 1-Signal) and you want to start in the opposite direction, the start will be delayed by the set time. This enables you to ensure that the start in the opposite direction only begins when the motor has stopped turning. This monitoring function works in all modes. If the start in the opposite direction is blocked, this is displayed in the operating window (Changing direction - Wait ). As soon as the monitoring has expired, this display disappears and you can start in the opposite direction. If you want to start again in the same direction, this monitoring has no effect and you can restart immediately.
TOL_SSM
Tolerance value for software speed monitor
Default: 50
Format INTEGER (1 - 255) Value X * cycle-time. (default setting accords to 5 seconds). The software speed monitor should sense an edge change at the pulse input within this time. Only then does the internal output have a 1-signal.
0-16
Output interfaces
EVS1 Logic signal direction 1 A 1-signal means "drive running in direction 1" in automatic mode or in single-start mode. It is mainly used for the interlocking with other drives and as a feedback to the route or the group. This signal is not generated in local mode!
EVS2 See EVS1
Logic signal direction 2
EST
Dynamic fault
When a fault occurs in a running drive, during drive start up or during stand-by mode, the dynamic fault bit is set. It remains set until the fault is acknowledged. Caution: In the following cases the drive fault cannot be acknowledged: - If the ON-command is permanently active; - With a welded contactor (ERM = 1-signal).
SST
Group fault
HORN
Start-up horn
This signal is set during the starting of the drive in single-start mode for a given time period and can be logically connected to trigger a start-up warning.
EVSP1
Logic signal direction 1 for sporadic drives
A 1-signal means drive has received a start command in automatic mode or in single start mode (Command Memory is ON). The drive starts when the interface ESPO has 1-Signal. The EVSP1-signal can be used as feedback to the route or the group.
EVSP2 look at EVSP1
Logic signal direction 2 for sporadic drives
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
In the Sequence Test mode SIM_ON has 1-Signal. If module drivers are used the output SIM_ON of the motor can be connected to SIM_ON of the driver blocks in order to switch all driver blocks to simulation mode.
0-17
Hardware outputs
EBE1 Command ON direction 1 The EBE1 signal is used to trigger the main contactor for direction 1.
EBE2 See EBE1
ELS1
Running/fault lamp direction 1
The ELS running/fault lamp signals the status of the drive and can be used for the connection of an annunciation lamp (when no visualization system is present). A continuous 1-signal indicates that the drive is running. Rapid flashing indicates a dynamic fault (non-acknowledged) and slow flashing indicates a static fault (already acknowledged). A 0signal indicates that the drive has stopped.
ELS2 Look at ELS1
Running/fault lamp direction 2
0-18
TEST_OSS Test interface The test interfaces are only used during module development and must not be changed!
Message ID
Command word
SSM_CVOS Interface to OS
Display counter software speed-monitor
Run-time for OS
Run-time for OS refreshed every hour
CNT1_OS Interface to OS
CNT1_H Interface to OS
CNT2_OS Interface to OS
CNT2_H Interface to OS
0-19
Status word for OS
Status word for OS
CURR_OS Interface to the OS
To display the current of the motor
CMEAS_DB Interface to the OS
Instance SB of the associated C_MEASUR
0-20
Annunciation characteristics
0-21
Module states
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Status / Display Text

off fault not acknowledged fault acknowledged running direction 1 running direction 2 local mode local mode running in direction. 1 local mode running in direction. 2 single mode single mode running in direction 1 single mode running in direction 2
Display Symbol
White Blinking red Red Green Green Yellow Blinking yellow Blinking yellow Blue Blinking blue Blinking blue
Text Presentation
Black, white White, red White, red Black, green Black, green Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, yellow Black, blue Black, blue Black, blue
Also refer to the OS variables table
Commands
0-22
I/O-bar of C_DRV_2D
Element ERM1 ERM2 ESB EBM EVO ESP ESR1 ESR2 EEVG1 EBVG1 EEVG2 EBVG2 ESVG ESVA ESPO EDRW ELOC EEIZ ESTB ETFG EMFR EMZS ELPZ EQIT EBFE1 EBFE2 Meaning Feedback 1 ON Feedback 2 ON Electrical availability Overload Local switch Local stop Local start direction 1 Local start direction 2 Start interlock direction 1 Operating interlock direction 1 Start interlock direction 2 Operating interlock direction 2 Protection interlock Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Sporadic on/off Hardware speed monitor Local mode release Single-start mode release Stand-by mode Inching release Annunciation release Fault interlock to the group Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Command direction 1 ON Command direction 2 ON BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 Typ e I I I I I I I I I I Attr. HMI Permitted Values
0-23
18 Bi-directional Drive Element EBFA QSTP DSIG_BQ STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 REL_SSM SW_SPEED SM_EVS_I NSTP_L_A LST_ACT REL_SC STAT_SC REL_MVC MV_PERC TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID COMMAND FEEDBTIM STARTDEL STOPDEL SPEEDTIM Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE BOOL INT INT Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B#16#0 0 0 0 Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U + + + + + U U U U U U U U U U Attr. HMI Permitted Values
Command OFF Quick stop Driver-Signal(s) Bad Quality Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Spare input transferred into STATUS 2 Release software speed monitor Pulse signal for software speed monitor EVS=1 when speed monitor 1-signal
No stop after switchover local auto Local Stop active in Automatic

Enable SIMOCODE Status SIMOCODE
enable display of motor current

Motor current from C_MEASUR Must not be changed Message ID Command word Feedback time Start delay Stop delay Speed monitor monitoring time
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD INT INT INT INT W#16#0 4 0 0 0
0-24
Reference Manual Objects Element HORN_TIM CHMONTIM TOL_SSM GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK Meaning Horn time for single start Monitoring change direction Tolerance value for software speed monitor Associated group/route Associated group/route For several routes/groups Format INT INT INT INT INT INT Default 10 10 50 0 0 0 Typ e I I I I I I
18 Bi-directional Drive Attr. HMI + + + Permitted Values
RES_RTOS RT_OS RT_H CNT1_OS CNT1_H CNT2_OS CNT2_H
Reset time RT for OS Run-time for OS Run-time for OS refreshed every hour Counter contactor dir.1 Counter contactor dir.1 refreshed every hour Counter contactor dir.2 Counter contactor dir.2 refreshed every hour
DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0 DWORD DW#16#0
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
U U U U U U U
+ + + + + + +
SSM_CVOS INTFC_OS VISU_OS STATUS STATUS2 ALARM CURR_OS CMEAS_DB EVS1 EVS2 EST SST
Display counter software speed monitor Interface status for OS Status for symbol display Status word for test Status word 2 Alarm word for test Display of motor current Instance DB from C_MEASURE Logic signal dir. 1 Logic signal dir. 2 Dynamic fault Group fault
BYTE
B#16#0
O O O O O O O O O O O O
U U U U U U
+ + + + +
DWORD DW#16#0 BYTE DWORD DWORD WORD INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL B#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 W#16#0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0-25
18 Bi-directional Drive Element HORN EVSP1 EVSP2 SIM_ON EBE1 EBE2 ELS1 ELS2 Meaning Start-up horn
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Typ e O O O O O O O O U U Attr. HMI Permitted Values
Logic signal sporadic drive Logic signal sporadic drive Simulation ON (drivers) Contactor direction 1 ON Contactor direction 2 ON Lamp direction 1 Lamp direction 2
0-26
OS variables table
OS Variabl No. S7 Par. Name
Annun. Class
Assignment
Output Level
Fault Class
Designation German
Designation English
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 OFF ON1 R_RTOS ON2 BDW_on/off 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
AUS EIN Richtung 1 Laufzeit lschen EIN Richtung 2 Brcke Drehwchter EIN/AUS
Commandword
OFF ON Direction 1 Reset Running Time OS ON Direction 2 Bypass Speed monitor ON/OFF
I/O
16Bit OM OM OM OM OM
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\18_Drv_2D_e.doc
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
0-27
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 LOCAL EIZ RIW BDW SSM EST ERM 1 ERM 2 ESS1 ESB EVO EBM ESD ESV LST ESS2 SQT SST BQU EKS1 EKS2 ON_DLY OFF_DLY VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU VISU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Betriebsart Vorort Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Richtungswechsel - Warte Brcke Drehwchter Softwaredrehwchter Ausgang Strung nicht quittiert Rckmeldung EIN Richtung 1 Rckmeldung EIN Richtung 2 Strung Schtz 1 Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung Vorort Strung Bimetall Strung Drehwchter Strung Schutzverriegelung Strung Vorort Stop Strung Schtz 2 Sequenz Test Sammelstrung Signal Strung Komando Speicher Komando Speicher Einschaltverzgerung Ausschaltverzgerung
Status
Local mode Single start mode released Changing direction - Wait Bypass speed monitor Software speed monitor output Fault not acknowledged Feedback ON Direction 1 Feedback ON Direction 2 Contactor fault 1 Electrical availability fault Local switch fault Overload fault Speed monitor fault Protection interlock fault Local Stop Contactor fault 2 Sequence Test general fault Bad Quality of signals Command memory Command memory ON delay OFF delay
S,O
16Bit
0-28
STATUS2
STA2_B40 STA2_B41 STA2_B42 STA2_B43 STA2_B44 STA2_B45 STA2_B46 STA2_B47 STA2_B30 STA2_B31 STA2_B32 STA2_B33 STA2_B34 STA2_B35 STA2_B36 STA2_B37 STA2_B20 STA2_B21 STA2_B22 STA2_B23 STA2_B24 STA2_B25 STA2_B26 STA2_B27 STA2_B10 STA2_B11 STA2_B12 STA2_B13 STA2_B14 STA2_B15 STA2_B16 STA2_B17 ERM1 ERM2 ESB EBM EVO ESP ESR1 ESR2 EBE1 EBE2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Status
Rckmeldung 1 EIN Rckmeldung 2 EIN Schaltbereitschaft Bimetall Vorortschalter Vorort Stop Vorort Start Richtung 1 Vorort Start Richtung 2 Befehl Richtung 1 EIN Befehl Richtung 2 EIN
Status
Feedback 1 ON Feedback 2 ON El. Availability Overload Local Switch Local Stop Local Start direction 1 Local Start direction 2 Command direction 1 ON/OFF Command direction 2 ON/OFF
S,O
16Bit
LST_ACT HORN EVSP1 EVSP2 EVS1 EVS2 REL_SC WA_SC REL_MVC
Vorort Stop aktiv in Automatik Anfahrwarnung sporadisch Richtung 1 sporadisch Richtung 2 Verknpfungssignal Ri.1 Verknpfungssignal Ri.2 Freigabe Simocode Warnung Simocode Freigabe Anzeige Strom
Local stop active in automatic startup warning sporadic ON direction 1 sporadic ON direction 2 Interlocking signal direction 1 Interlocking signal direction 2 Enable Simocode General Warning Simocode Enable display of current
0-29
VISU_OS
schw,wei wei,rot wei,rot schw,grn schw,grn schw,gelb schw,gelb schw,gelb schw,trkis schw,trkis schw,trkis
dezimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B
Zustand fr Symbol und Texte Steht Strung nicht quittiert Strung quittiert Luft Richtung 1 Luft Richtung 2 Vorortbetrieb steht Luft im Vorortbetrieb Ri.1 Luft im Vorortbetrieb Ri.2 Einzelbetrieb steht Luft im Einzelbetrieb Ri.1 Luft im Einzelbetrieb Ri.2
Status for Symbol and Text off fault not acknowledged fault acknowledged running direction 1 running direction 2 local mode local mode running direction 1 local mode running direction 2 single mode single mode running direction 1 single mode running direction 2
S,O
Byte
AlarmWord
ALA_ESS1 ALA_ESB ALA_EVO ALA_EBM ALA_ESD ALA_LST ALA_ESS2 ALA_REP SIG1 SIG2 SIG3 SIG4 SIG5 SIG6 SIG7 SIG8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Strung Schtz Richtung 1 Strung elektrische Schaltbereitschaft Strung Vorort Strung Bimetall Strung Drehwchter Vorort Stop Strung Schtz Richtung 2 Strung noch vorhanden
Alarm
Contactor fault direction 1 Electrical availability fault Local switch fault Overload fault Speed monitor fault local stop Contactor fault direction 2 Still Faulty
16Bit ALF ALF E E ESS ESB
ALF S EVO ALF M EBM ALF M DER ALF S LST ALF E ESS ALF P REP
0-30
FEEDBTIM STARTDEL SPEEDTIM HORN_TIM STOPDEL CHMONTIM TOL_SSM SSM_CVOS RT_OS RES_RTOS RT_H
Rckmeldezeit Einschaltverzgerung Drehwchterberwachungszeit Hupzeit fr Einzelstart Ausschaltverzgerung berwachung Drehrichtungswechsel Toleranz Softwaredrehwchter Istwert Software Drehwchter Betriebszeit in sek fr OS Rcksetzzeit der Betriebszeit Betriebszeit fr MIS akt. Je Stunde
feedback time start delay speed monitor time time for start up warning stop delay Monitoring change direction Tolerance speed monitor actual value software speed monitor run time in sec for OS reset time for runtime OS run time for MIS refreshed every h
D D D D D D D D D D
xxx xxxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxxxx Datum/U hr
sek. sek. sek. sek. sek. sek
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O O
0-999 0-9999 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 1-255 1-255 x/3600 Datum/Uhr Dword
OM OM OM OM OM OM OM
O O O
0-31
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 EEVG1 EBVG1 ESVG ESVA ESPO EDRW EEVG2 EBVG2 ELOC EEIZ ESTB ETFG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Nahtstellenwort
Einschaltverriegelung Ri.1 Betriebsverriegelung Ri1 Schutzverriegelung Schutzverriegelung (nur Automatikb.) Sporadisch Ein/Aus Drehwchter Einschaltverriegelung Ri.2 Betriebsverriegelung Ri2 Vorortbetrieb Freigabe Einzelbetrieb Freigabe Betriebsart Stand-by Tipp-Freigabe
Interfaceword
Start interlock direction 1 Operating interlock direction 1 Protection interlock (always active) Protection interlock (only automat.) Sporadic ON/OFF Speed monitor Start interlock direction 2 Operating interlock direction 2 Local mode release Single start mode release Stand-by mode Inching release
Bit
32Bit
REL_SSM REL_EVS_I
Software-Drehwchter EVS=1 sofort bei EDRW=1
release software speed monitoring EVS=1 immediately when EDRW=1
EMFR EMZS
Meldefreigabe Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe
ELPZ EQIT EBFE1 EBFE2 EBFA QSTP
Lampen prfen (Zusatz) Quittieren (Zusatz) Befehl Richtung 1 Ein Befehl Richtung 2 Ein Befehl Aus Schnellstop
Lamp test (additional) Acknowledge (additional) Command direction 1 ON Command direction 2 ON Command OFF Quick stop
0-32
0-33
Annunciation Module with 8 Alarms
19 Annunciation Module with 8 Alarms
19 ANNUNCIATION MODULE WITH 8 ALARMS

Description of C_ANNUN8 Type/Number Calling OBs Function Operating principle Input interfaces Releases Links Example of a circuit: Process values Output interfaces Interfaces for test purposes Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Module states Commands I/O-bar of C_ANNUN8 OS-Variablentabelle
1
2 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 6 7 8 8 8 9 9 11 11 12 15
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\19_ANNUN8_e.doc
19-1
Description of C_ANNUN8
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_ANNUN8 FB1005
Calling OBs
C_ANNUN8 must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
This block can generate 7 individual alarms. The 8th alarm is used for alarm repetition. With annunciation modules, binary signals can be displayed on the screen as an alarm message.
There are two basic applications for annunciation modules: Drive faults Annunciation of drive faults which cannot be signalled by the drive itself. These are the signals which are connected to the protection interlock (e.g. belt drift, pull-rope, bearing temperature etc.). Process signal annunciations (interlocks) Annunciation of process signals such as silo levels and interlocks.
19-2
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\19_ANNUN8_e.doc
Operating principle
Input interfaces
FLS1 FLS7 Fault Basic state 0-signal When a signal changes its state from 0 to 1 at one of these interfaces, an alarm is generated. If a signal delay (e.g. TFLS1) is set for response, the output signal F1 and the alarm are delayed by this time. Corresponds to MST0 of the C_ANNUNC.
INH1 INH7
Fault interlock
With 1-signal at INH1 the input FLS1 is blocked. In this case the output F1 has 0-signal and no alarm is generated even when the input FLS1 has 1-signal. With the edge from 1 to 0 at INH1 the input FLS1 will become active after the time TINH has elapsed. Typical application: When a drive is not started or it is during the starting phase and should not generate any alarm (e.g. pump with pressure monitoring) the negated EVS-signal of the drive can be applied to the INHx The activation of the fault can be specified via the delay TINH.
FAT1 FAT7
Alarm activation
If the Block is used together with drives, e.g. in order to give an alarm for Protection signals like rope switch, belt drift etc. The EST (KST, VST) of the corresponding drive must be connected to this interface. With this connection the annunciation block generates an alarm every time the drive is stopped by this fault or if the fault already exists and anybody tries to start the drive.
SWK
Fault release
With 0-signal at this interface, the annunciation function as well as all outputs are blocked. Valid for all eight fault inputs. Corresponds to MMFR with output block. Typical application: In the case of a control supply voltage failure for MCC or field signals, one alarm message would be triggered for each sensor signal. To avoid this, one should connect the control voltage signal to the annunciation release interface at the appropriate modules. This results in no alarm being produced. The cause of the control voltage failure is reported by an annunciation module configured for this.
FAIG
A 1-signal on FAIG prevents that the dynamic and static fault is passed to the group. The GBE is not effected by this fault when the group is started. Valid for all eight inputs. If one does not want to indicate a fault with the annunciation module but an interlock, then FAIG must be connected with 1-signal. The alarm in the annunciation line appears like a fault, but then indicates the interlock. Corresponds to MMZS.
19-3
QUIT
Application in control desk engineering. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, then one has to connect the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) to this interface. Corresponds to MQIT Caution: When using the MQIT interface, the acknowledgement on all the AGs at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
DSIG_BQ
This Interface can be used for the visualization of bad quality status for the I/O Card. This is only possible if driver blocks are used. For the visualization of the module status the outputs QBAD of the driver blocks must be connected with an OR Function to Interface DSIG_BQ. The status Bad Quality is then shown in the Faceplate of the annunciation block.
19-4
Releases
REL_SIM_ON Simulation On Basic state 0-Signal The enable for simulation can be switched on/off only from Diagnostic Picture. To enable the Simulation value from the driver block, the output SIM_ON of the annunciation block has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. Caution: REL_SIM_ON is no block parameter
Links
The fault of the annunciation module is represented as a group fault in the status display of the associated group/route. The status call function for group or route displays the detailed fault. To ensure this function, every annunciation module must be connected to at least one route or group to which it belongs from an annunciation viewpoint.
GR_LINK1
The GR_LINK1 interface of the annunciation module must be connected to the R_LINK interface of the route or with the G_LINK interface of the group.
GR_LINK2
If the annunciation module belongs to two different routes or groups, the GR_LINK2 interface must be connected to the second route/group.
MUX_LINK
If the annunciation module belongs to more than two different routes or groups, the C_MUX module must be series-connected. C_MUX has 5 inputs (GR_LINK1 to GR_LINK5) for connection to the groups/routes and one output (MUX_OUT) for connection to the MUX_LINK interface of the annunciation module. Caution: The MUX_IN interface can under no circumstances be used for direct connection to a group or route. It is used exclusively for connection to another MUX module.
19-5
Meldung 1 C_ANNUNC MAIN_TASK 1/2
G_LINK
I I G_LINK
R_LINK
R_LINK
I G_LINK I I I
Caution: Observe the processing sequence! The C_MUX module must be called before the annunciation module. For the other modules, the run sequence is as follows: First the annunciations, measured values and drives, then the associated routes and finally the associated groups.
19-6
Process values
The process values can be set during configuration and they can be changed online from the OS. To permit the modification of the process values from the faceplates, they must not be connected in the CFC.
TFLS1 TFLS7
Signal delay on activation
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During signal change from FLS 0 to 1, the signal output F1 F8 and the alarm message are delayed by the set time.
TINH1 TINH7
Signal delay of the fault interlock
Default: 0
Format INTEGER (0 - 999) Value in seconds. During signal change from INH 1 to 0, the fault interlock is released again after the set time. The output and the alarms are active again.
19-7
Output interfaces
F1 F7 Output signals, fault Always use one of these signals for the control so that delays that have been configured can take effect.
SIM_ON
Simulation ON
This output has to be connected to input SIM_ON of the driver block. This enables to switch on/off the simulation from the faceplate. Refer to Release functions.
FX
Output signal, all faults
If one of the output signals F1 F7 has 1-signal, FX also has 1-signal. If there are no faults on the entire module, FX is 0.
Interfaces for test purposes

TEST_OSS Test interface The test interfaces are only for the module development and must not be changed!
Alarm word for test
Interfaces to OS
MSG8_EVID Interface to OS Message ID
MODFL_OS Interface to OS
Module output status for OS
19-8
The module uses the ALARM_8 module to generate annunciations. A plausibility and priority logic at the process level analyses all object faults Only one fault annunciation is issued for each fault Secondary annunciations are suppressed automatically The fault source is recorded in detail and uniquely. The current operational state of the plant objects is automatically taken into consideration during the fault analysis, e.g. all fault annunciations are suppressed automatically for a stationary group No superfluous fault annunciations are created The operator does not need to manually disable/suppress any annunciations. Each fault annunciation is also classified. This shows whether an electrical or a mechanical fault, a process fault or a shut-down with a local safety switch applies. An electrician does not always need to be called first The production operator can give specific instructions.
19-9
See the following annunciation configuration for the "C_ANNUN8".
1. The annunciations SIG_1 to SIG_4 are configured as alarms. 2. The annunciations SIG_5 to SIG_8 are configured as warnings. 3. As standard, the fault abbreviation is F1 to F8. The abbreviation and annunciation text (4.) appear in the annunciation line. 4. The annunciation text is entered here, maximum of 40 characters. 5. The fault types, P = process fault, M = mechanical fault, E = electrical fault, etc.
6. The alarm class is entered in the Attribute tab, annunciations 1-4 configured as alarms, annunciations 5-8 configured as warnings.
19-10
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "real" annunciations. An annunciation release for each object means that the communication and OS are not overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure.
Module states
No fault Fault not acknowledged Fault acknowledged
Icon Display
White Blinking red Red
Text Presentation
Black, white White, red White, red
Commands
19-11
I/O-bar of C_ANNUN8
C_ANNUN8
Permitted Values
Element FLS1 INH1 FAT1 FLS2 INH2 FAT2 FLS3 INH3 FAT3 FLS4 INH4 FAT4 FLS5 INH5 FAT5 FLS6 INH6 FAT6 FLS7 INH7 FAT7 SWK FAIG QUIT DSIG_BQ
Meaning Signal input for fault 1 Fault interlock 1 Alarm activation 1 Signal input for fault 2 Fault interlock 2 Alarm activation 2 Signal input for fault 3 Fault interlock 3 Alarm activation 3 Signal input for fault 4 Fault interlock 4 Alarm activation 4 Signal input for fault 5 Fault interlock 5 Alarm activation 5 Signal input for fault 6 Fault interlock 6 Alarm activation 6 Signal input for fault 7 Fault interlock 7 Alarm activation 7 Fault release Fault interlock to the group Acknowledge (additional) Driver Signal(s) bad quality
Default 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U
HMI
19-12
Reference Manual Objects Element TEST_OSS MSG8_EVID TFLS1 TINH1 TFLS2 TINH2 TFLS3 TINH3 TFLS4 TINH4 TFLS5 TINH5 TFLS6 TINH6 TFLS7 TINH7 GR_LINK1 GR_LINK2 MUX_LINK PAR_OS INTFC_OS MODFL_OS STATUS ALARM FX F1 F2 Meaning Must not be changed Message ID Signal delay on activation 1 Signal delay of the fault interlock 1 Signal delay on activation 2 Signal delay of the fault interlock 2 Signal delay on activation 3 Signal delay of the fault interlock 3 Signal delay on activation 4 Signal delay of the fault interlock 4 Signal delay on activation 5 Signal delay of the fault interlock 5 Signal delay on activation 6 Signal delay of the fault interlock 6 Signal delay on activation 7 Signal delay of the fault interlock 7 Associated group/route Associated group/route For several groups/routes Parameter status for OS Interface status for OS Module output status for OS Status word for test Alarm word for test Output signal, all Output signal, fault 1 Output signal, fault 2 Format INT Default 0
Annunciation Module with 8 Alarms Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O U U U U U + + + + U U + + + + + + + + + + + + + + HMI Permitted Values
DWORD DW#16#0 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT WORD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W#16#0
DWORD DW#16#0 WORD BOOL BOOL BOOL W#16#0 0 0 0
19-13
Annunciation Module with 8 Alarms Element F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 SIM_ON Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type Attr. O O O O O O HMI Permitted Values
Output signal, fault 3 Output signal, fault 4 Output signal, fault 5 Output signal, fault 6 Output signal, fault 7 Simulation on
19-14
OS-Variablentabelle
Annun. Class
Designation German
Designation English
Assignment
OS Variable
Output Level
Fault Class
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 SOO
Commandword
1 Simulation ON/OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Commandword
Simulation ON/OFF
Bit
I/O
16Bit
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\19_ANNUN8_e.doc
Event Text
S7 Par. Name
Value Range
Type
Unit
19-15
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17 DYN SIG1 SIG2 SIG3 SIG4 SIG5 SIG6 SIG7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status
Strung nicht quittiert Strung 1 quittiert Strung 2 quittiert Strung 3 quittiert Strung 4 quittiert Strung 5 quittiert Strung 6 quittiert
Status
Fault not acknowledged Fault 1 acknowledged Fault 2 acknowledged Fault 3 acknowledged Fault 4 acknowledged Fault 5 acknowledged Fault 6 acknowledged Fault 7 acknowledged
S,O
Bitmap
16Bit
SIM BQU F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 FX
8 Strung 7 quittiert 9 10 11 12 13 14 Simulation ON 15 Signal Strung 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Ausgangssignal 1 Ausgangssignal 2 Ausgangssignal 3 Ausgangssignal 4 Ausgangssignal 5 Ausgangssignal 6 Ausgangssignal 7 Sammelstrung
Simulation ON Bad Quality of signals Output signal 1 Output signal 2 Output signal 3 Output signal 4 Output signal 5 Output signal 6 Output signal 7 Output total fault
19-16
AlarmWord
ALA_MST1 ALA_MST2 ALA_MST3 ALA_MST4 ALA_MST5 ALA_MST6 ALA_MST7 ALA_res 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alarm
Strung 1 Strung 2 Strung 3 Strung 4 Strung 5 Strung 6 Strung 7
Alarm
Fault 1 Fault 2 Fault 3 Fault 4 Fault 5 Fault 6 Fault 7
16Bit PM Anw. Anw.
PM Signalverzgerung bei Ansprechen Delay for incoming faults Signalverzgerung fr Delay for fault interlocking Strungsverriegelung D D xxxx xxxx sec. sec. I/O I/O 0-999 0-999 OM OM
P TFLS11-8 TINH1-8
TFLS1 TFLS8 TINH1 TINH8
19-17
INTFC_OS
OS_IF_B40 OS_IF_B41 OS_IF_B42 OS_IF_B43 OS_IF_B44 OS_IF_B45 OS_IF_B46 OS_IF_B47 OS_IF_B30 OS_IF_B31 OS_IF_B32 OS_IF_B33 OS_IF_B34 OS_IF_B35 OS_IF_B36 OS_IF_B37 OS_IF_B20 OS_IF_B21 OS_IF_B22 OS_IF_B23 OS_IF_B24 OS_IF_B25 OS_IF_B26 OS_IF_B27 OS_IF_B10 OS_IF_B11 OS_IF_B12 OS_IF_B13 OS_IF_B14 OS_IF_B15 OS_IF_B16 OS_IF_B17 FLS1 INH1 FAT FLS2 INH2 FAT FLS3 INH3 FAT FLS4 INH4 FAT FLS5 INH5 FAT FLS6 INH6 FAT FLS7 INH7 FAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Nahtstellenwort
Strung 1 Strungsverrieglung 1 Alarmaktivierung 1 Strung 2 Strungsverrieglung 2 Alarmaktivierung 2 Strung 3 Strungsverrieglung 3 Alarmaktivierung 3 Strung 4 Strungsverrieglung 4 Alarmaktivierung 4 Strung 5 Strungsverrieglung 5 Alarmaktivierung 5 Strung 6 Strungsverrieglung 6 Alarmaktivierung 6 Strung 7 Strungsverrieglung 7 Alarmaktivierung 7
Interfaceword
Fault 1 Fault interlock 1 Alarm activation 1 Fault 2 Fault interlock 2 Alarm activation 2 Fault 3 Fault interlock 3 Alarm activation 3 Fault 4 Fault interlock 4 Alarm activation 4 Fault 5 Fault interlock 5 Alarm activation 5 Fault 6 Fault interlock 6 Alarm activation 6 Fault 7 Fault interlock 7 Alarm activation 7
Bit
32Bit
QUIT FAIG SWK
25 Quittieren (Zusatz) 26 Strungsverriegelung zur Gruppe 27 Strungsfreigabe 28 29 30 31 32
Acknowledge (additional) Fault interlock to group Fault release
19-18
Adapter for SIMOCODE
22 Adapter for SIMOCODE
22 ADAPTER FOR SIMOCODE

Description of C_SIMO_A Type/Number Calling OBs Function Settings and Configuration for SIMOCODE Interface between block C_SIMO_A and SIMOCODE Unit Naming conventions in CFC Example: C_DRV_2D with SIMOCODE Operating principle Hardware inputs Input interfaces Releases Process values Output interfaces Hardware outputs Interfaces to OS Time characteristics Message characteristics Commands I/O-bar of C_SIMO_A OS variables table
1
2 2 2 2 3 4 6 7 8 8 9 10 10 11 13 13 14 14 14 15 17
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Ausgabe: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\22_SIMO_A_e.doc
22-1
Description of C_SIMO_A
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_SIMO_A FB1033
Calling OBs
C_SELECT must be called in OB1 (MAIN_TASK).
Function
The SIMOCODE Adapter block C_SIMO_A can be used to establish a connection between the CEMAT drive block and the SIMOCODE. Due to the modular concept the SIMOCODE Adapter block can be used for One-directional drives, Bi-directional drives, valves and dampers. The 4 input signals of the SIMOCODE will be transferred to a block output and can be used individually (e. g. for Local Switch or ESB).
The block has been tested with the following parameter settings.
The SIMOCODE adapter block is open (no KNOW_HOW_PROTECT) and you can modify the block according to your requirements.
IMPORTANT In general, no warranty can be given for changes of the block, because this is entirely the responsibility of the user. It is always recommended to make a backup of the block before proceeding.
22-2
Settings and Configuration for SIMOCODE

SIMOCODE Parameter settings All Parameter settings can be carried out with "Win-SIMOCODE DP Professional". Basic type 1 and 2 are supported. Basic type 1 :(12 byte read and 4 byte write) Basic type 2 :(4 byte read and 4 byte write)
After the installation of CEMAT you will find 2 Examples for SMC-Files under D:\CemV6\Tools\SIMOCODE
C_DRV_2D_BTYP1_SMC C_DRV_2D_BTYP2_SMC
Basic Type 1 with Thermistor Basic Type 2
For all further information refer to SIMOCODE Manual.
22-3
Interface between block C_SIMO_A and SIMOCODE Unit

Basic Type 2 Read Byte 0 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SIMOCODE Reference [144] [199] [146] [193] [186] [202] [150] [151] Status On1 Thermistor fault (BasicType 2) Status On2 Overload fault Overload and asymmetry warning Motor stalled Status General fault Status General warning Signal
Read Byte 1 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SIMOCODE Reference [152] [147] [192] [194] [003] [000] [002] [001] Status Ready Status Overload warning Earth fault Overload fault Basic Unit Input 4 Basic Unit Input 1 Basic Unit Input 3 Basic Unit Input 2 Signal
Read Byte 2 and 3 Motor current
Additional for Basic Type 1 Read Byte 11 and 12 Thermistor Value
22-4
Write Control Byte 0 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SIMOCODE Reference On 1 Off On 2 Not used Emergency start Automatic Reset CPU-OK Signal
byte 1, 2, 3 are not used
22-5
Naming conventions in CFC

The SIMOCODE Adapter block must have the same tagname as the corresponding drive plus the appendix "_SC"
Example: A motor has the following tagname: 312_SC/M01
The chart name is as follows:
312_SC1
The instance name for the motor is: The instance name for the SIMOCODE Adapter must be:
M01 M01_SC
22-6
Example: C_DRV_2D with SIMOCODE
22-7
Operating principle
Hardware inputs
BASICTYP Basic type Basic state = 2
SIMOCODE Communication Type Type 2: Type 1: 4 byte read and 4 byte write (Standard) 12 byte read and 4 byte write. CEMAT uses additionally byte 11 and 12 for the Thermistor Value.
If no valid value is entered to this interface, all outputs will be reset, the block is no longer processed and the output QPARF is set to 1-Signal (Parameter failure).
I_ADDR
Input start address
SIMOCODE Input start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)
O_ADDR
Output start address
SIMOCODE Output start address as configured in HW Config (must be in the process image)
22-8
Input interfaces
START1 Start in Direction 1 Basic state 0-signal 1-Signal at Interface START1 starts the drive into direction 1. The output EBFE/EBFE1/KEB1 of the drive block has to be connected to this input.
START2
Start in Direction 2
1-Signal at Interface START2 starts the drive into direction 2. The output EBFE/EBFE2/KEB2 of the drive block has to be connected to this input. If START1=0 and START2=0, the drive will be stopped.
RESET
Reset SIMOCODE von extern
The SIMOCODE fault can be reset via Faceplate or using interface RESET. With 1-Signal at interface RESET the Reset Signal will be sent to the SIMOCODE.
ACK
Acknowledge from extern
Used only with conventional control desks. If one has several separate control desks and wants to acknowledge on each separately, the corresponding acknowledge signal (pulse) has to be connected to this interface. Application in control desk engineering. Caution: Using ACK the PLC-wide Acknowledgement at the C_PUSHBT module must not be connected.
RES_PBFT
Automatic Reset after PROFIBUS fault
After PROFIBUS communication fault, all SIMOCODE have a General fault and need to be reset. If this parameter is connected with 1-Signal, after PROFIBUS communication fault the SIMOCODE will automatically get a reset command. Caution: All drives which are started without external start command (as for example Positioners) should not have a 1-Signal at RES_PBFT.
22-9
Releases
There are currently no operational release functions for the SIMOCODE adapter block.
Process values
I_N Format REAL At this parameter the nominal current must be entered. The value must be in accordance with the SIMOCODE parameterisation. Nominal Current in Ampere (Set Current) Default: 100.0
CUR_HIGH
Current high limit in %
Default: 400
Format INTEGER (0 - 600) The value must be in accordance with the SIMOCODE parameterisation.
CUR_LOW
Current low limit in %
Default: 20
Format INTEGER (5 - 100) The value must be in accordance with the SIMOCODE parameterisation.
HYSTERES
Hysteresis in %.
Default: 5
Format INTEGER (0 - 9) Hysteresis value for current limits.
OVWA_DLY
Delay for overload warning (s)
Default: 3
Format INTEGER (0 - 32000) Value in seconds. The warning will be delayed by this time.
TERM_FAC
Factor for Thermistor value
Default: 5
Format INTEGER (0 - 9)
22-10
Output interfaces
READY SIMOCODE Ready 1-Signal means the communication to the SIMOCODE is ok.
FAULT_SC
General Fault SIMOCODE
1-Signal means general fault at the SIMOCODE. After correction of the fault the Reset Button must be pressed.
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
After correction of the fault the Reset Button must be pressed
OV_FT
Overload fault
OVASY_FT
Overload + asymmetry fault
THER_FT
Thermistor fault
STALL_FT
Motor stalled
EARTH_FT
Earth fault
WARN_SC
Summarizing warning SIMOCODE
1-Signal general warning at the SIMOCODE.
OV_WA
Overload warning
OVASY_WA
Overload + asymmetry warning
22-11
CUR_L_WA
Current low warning
This warning is initiated if the current value (I_PERC) is smaller than the value at parameter CUR_LOW
CUR_H_WA
Current high warning
This warning is initiated if the current value (I_PERC) is bigger than the value at parameter CUR_HIGH
STAT_SC Format BYTE
Status SIMOCODE
This output has to be connected to input STAT_SC of the corresponding drive. See Example CFC.
I_PERC
Current value in %
This output has to be connected to input MV_PERC of the corresponding drive. See Example CFC.
INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 1
INPUT1_0 corresponds to the Hardware-Input 1 at the SIMOCODE Basic Unit (e. g. ESB), which has been transferred into the status word. The status of the HW Input is available at INPUT1_O and can be connected to the CEMAT drive block.
INPUT2_O see INPUT1_O
Basic Unit Input 2
Basic Unit Input 3
Basic Unit Input 4
FEED_ON1
Feedback ON direction 1
This signal must be connected to the corresponding Input of the drive block. For C_DRV_2D with Feedback direction 1 FEED_ON2 Feedback ON direction 2
This signal must be connected to the corresponding Input of the drive block. For C_DRV_1D with Feedback ON For C_DRV_2D with Feedback direction 2 PARAM_FT Parameter Fault
1-Signal means, the value for BASICTYP is neither 1 nor 2, or I_ADDR, O_ADDR contain a negative address.
22-12
Hardware outputs
There are no hardware module outputs for the C_SIMO_A.
Interfaces to OS
MSG8_EVID Interface to OS Message ID
Command word
Status word
I_ABS Interface to OS
Current value Ampere
THERMIST Interface to OS
Thermistor Temperature
22-13
The run sequence can be chosen as desired for the selection module.
Alarm archive and alarm logs show only "true" annunciations. An annunciation release for each object insures that the communication and OS are not overloaded with an "annunciation storm" - e.g. overloaded after a power failure. The alarms will be generated according to the Status bytes 0 and 1. In case of a warning only a summarizing alarm is generated.
Commands
22-14
I/O-bar of C_SIMO_A
C_SIMO_A
Typ e I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U + U U U + + + + + + 0-9 Permitted Values
Element BASICTYP I_ADDR O_ADDR START1 START2 RESET ACK RES_PBFT I_N CUR_HIGH CUR_LOW HYSTERES OVWA_DLY THER_FAC MSG8_EVID COMMAND
Meaning Basic type (2 = standard, 1 = with temp.) Input start address Output start address ON1 to SIMOCODE (Start direction 1) ON2 to SIMOCODE (Start Direction 2= Reset SIMOCODE from external Acknowledge from external Auto-reset after Profibus fault or PLC start Nominal Current in Ampere (Set Current) Current high limit in % Current low limit in % Hysteresis limit in % Delay for overload warning (s) Factor for thermistor value Message ID Command word
Format INT INT INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL REAL INT INT INT INT REAL
Default 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.0 400 20 5 3 0.0
Attr.
HMIK +
STATUS I_PERC I_ABS THERMIST READY FAULT_SC EARTH_FT OV_FT
Status word Current in % Current in Ampere Thermistor Temperature SIMOCODE ready (Communication OK)
DWORD DW#16#0 INT REAL REAL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0
O O O O O O O O
U U U U U
+ +
General fault SIMOCODE

Earth fault Overload fault
U U
22-15
Element OVASY_FT THER_FT STALL_FT WARN_SC OV_WA OVASY_WA CUR_L_WA CUR_H_WA STAT_SC INPUT1_O INPUT2_O INPUT3_O INPUT4_O FEED_ON1 FEED_ON2 PARAM_FT
Meaning Overload + asymmetrie Thermistor fault Motor stalled General warning SIMOCODE Overload warning Overload + asymmetry warning Current low warning Current high warning Status SIMOCODE (for connection to drive) Basic Unit Input 1 Basic Unit Input 2 Basic Unit Input 3 Basic Unit Input 4 Feedback ON direction 1 Feedback ON direction 2 Parameter failure (engineering failure)
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Typ e O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Attr. U U U
HMIK
Permitted Values
U U U U
22-16
OS variables table
Annun. Class Output Level Presentation Number NK Assignment. OS-Var. No.
Fault Class
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
CommandWord
COM_B20 COM_B21 COM_B22 COM_B23 COM_B24 COM_B25 COM_B26 COM_B27 COM_B10 COM_B11 COM_B12 COM_B13 COM_B14 COM_B15 COM_B16 COM_B17 Auto_Loc EM_ START RESET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Commandword
Automatic / Vorort Notstart Reset SIMOCODE
Commandword
Local automatic coder Emergency start Reset SIMOCODE
Bit
I/O
16Bit
StatusWord
STA_B40 STA_B41 STA_B42 STA_B43 STA_B44 STA_B45 STA_B46 STA_B47 READY OV_WA EARTH_FT OV+ASY_FT BU_IN4 BU_IN1 BU_IN3 BU_IN2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status
Ready berlast Warnung Erdschlu Strung berlast + Unsymmetrie Strung Grundgert Eingang4 Grundgert Eingang1 Grundgert Eingang3 Grundgert Eingang2
Status
Ready Overload warning Earth fault Overload + asymmetry fault Basic unit Input4 Basic unit Input1 Basic unit Input3 Basic unit Input2
S,O
Bit
16Bit
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\22_SIMO_A_e.doc
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
22-17
Annun. Class
Output Level
Presentation Number NK
Assignment.
OS-Var. No.
Fault Class
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
STA_B30 STA_B31 STA_B32 STA_B33 STA_B34 STA_B35 STA_B36 STA_B37 STA_B20 STA_B21 STA_B22 STA_B23 STA_B24 STA_B25 STA_B26 STA_B27 STA_B10 STA_B11 STA_B12 STA_B13 STA_B14 STA_B15 STA_B16 STA_B17
ON1 THER_FT ON2 OV_FT OV_ASY_WA STALL_FT GEN_FT GEN_WA SQT EM_START Auto I> I< P_BUS
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 16 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Ein Richtung 1 Thermistor Strung Ein Richtung 2 berlast Strung berlast + Unsymmetrie Warnung Block. motor Strung Sammelstrung Sammelwarnung Sequenz Test Notstart Betriebsart Automatik Strom grer CUR_HIGH Strom kleiner CUR_LOW Keine Kommunikation
On direction 1 Thermistor fault On direction 2 Overload fault Overload+asymmetry warn. Motor stalled fault General fault General warning Sequence test Emergency Start Automatic mode Current > CUR_HIGH Current < CUR_LOW No Communication
22-18
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
Annun. Class
Output Level
Presentation Number NK
Assignment.
OS-Var. No.
Fault Class
S7-Par-Name
Designation German
Designation English
AlarmWord
ALA_SIG1 ALA_SIG2 ALA_SIG3 ALA_SIG4 ALA_SIG5 ALA_SIG6 ALA_SIG7 ALA_SIG8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm
Alarm
OM OM SEL DESEL
I_N I_PERC I_ABS CURR_LOW CURR_HIGH HYSTERES THERMIST I_ADDR O_ADDR BASICTYPE
Nennstrom Strom in % Strom in Ampere Strom niedrig in % Strom hoch in % Hysterese in % Thermistor Temperatur Eingangs Startadresse Ausgangs Startadresse Basistyp
Nominal current Current in % Current in Ampere Current low in % Current high in % Hysteresis in % Thermistor temperature Input start address Output start address Basic type
Event Text
Value Range
Type
Unit
22-19
C_INTERL
28 C_INTERL
28 C_INTERL
Description of C_INTERL Type/Number Calling OBs Function Engineering Error handling Start-up characteristics Time response Assignment of the 32-bit status word VSTATUS Message characteristics Monitoring of process variables I/O-bar of C_INTERL VSTATUS for C_INTERL Operator control and monitoring Display Operator Control:
1
2 2 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 7 8 8 8
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 22.03.2004 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\28_Interlock_e.doc
28-1
C_INTERL
Description of C_INTERL
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_INTERL FB1075
Calling OBs
In the same OB with and after the last block whose signals are to be displayed on theC_INTERL.
Function
The C_INTERL block is used to implement a standardized interlock display which can be called on the OS. The block can be assigned a maximum of 10 input signals, which can each be inverted as required. Operating Principle The first five inputs I1_1 to I1_5 form a group. Each signal can be linked logically either directly or inverted by setting the corresponding inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5. The same applies to the second group of five inputs. The type of logic operation of the first group is set at the AND_OR1 parameter. NEGRES_1 = 1 inverts the result of Q1 used to form Q via AND_OR3. Output Q1, however is not inverted. The two group results can be operated linked logically by an AND/OR operation. The logic result LOG1 is represented by green color.
28-2
C_INTERL
Engineering
AS: CFC Plan editing example: The assignment of instance names is particularly important when the Interlock module is used. Depending on the "main object", the name is formed as follows. For example, C_DRV_1D motor with plant identifier "FK11/E001" should be given an interlock protective circuit on the input interface "ESVG". The name of the interlock module instances consists of: FK11/E001 _ESVG 1-3 = main object = interface description = number of the interlock modules, max . 3 units
i.e. FK11/E001_ESVG1 is the name of the first interlock module.
Please note: - Correctly select the interconnection logic (red background means error) - Assign the signal designations for the control room operator with understandable text. - Only Text_1 is displayed in the Faceplate
OS: No further parameterisation is necessary. However, an OS compile must be carried out (in order to generate the tags in the tag management).
28-3
C_INTERL
Error handling
Only by means of the operating system.
Start-up characteristics
No special measures taken.
Time response
The block does not have a time response.
Assignment of the 32-bit status word VSTATUS

see VSTATUS for C_INTERL
Does not exist.

Does not exist.
28-4
C_INTERL
I/O-bar of C_INTERL
C_INTERL
Permitted Values
Element AND_OR1 AND_OR2 AND_OR3 I1_1 I1_2 I1_3 I1_4 I1_5 I2_1 I2_2 I2_3 I2_4 I2_5 NEG1_1 NEG1_2 NEG1_3 NEG1_4 NEG1_5 NEG2_1 NEG2_2 NEG2_3 NEG2_4 NEG2_5 Q
Meaning 1= AND, 0= OR first group
Format BOOL
Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
HMI
1= AND, 0= OR second group BOOL 1= AND, 0= OR both groups Input signal 1, first group Input signal 2, first group Input signal 3, first group Input signal 4, first group Input signal 5, first group Input signal 1, second group Input signal 2, second group Input signal 3, second group Input signal 4, second group Input signal 5, second group 1 = I1_1 will be inverted 1 = I1_2 will be inverted 1 = I1_3 will be inverted 1 = I1_4 will be inverted 1 = I1_5 will be inverted 1 = I2_1 will be inverted 1 = I2_2 will be inverted 1 = I2_3 will be inverted 1 = I2_4 will be inverted 1 = I2_5 will be inverted Output signal BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
+ + + + + + + + + +
28-5
C_INTERL Element Q1 Q2 QC_Q QC_Q_I VSTATUS Meaning
Reference Manual Objects Format BOOL BOOL BYTE BYTE Default 0 0 16#80 16#80 Type Attr. O O O I O + HMI Permitted Values
Interim result, first group Interim result, second group Quality Code for Q Quality Code for output Q Extended status display in block icons
DWORD DW#16#0
28-6
C_INTERL
VSTATUS for C_INTERL
Comment
Variable Name
I1_1 I1_2 I1_3 I1_4 I1_5 I2_1 I2_2 I2_3 I2_4 I2_5 NEG1_1 NEG1_2 NEG1_3 NEG1_4 NEG1_5 NEG2_1 NEG2_2 NEG2_3 NEG2_4 NEG2_5 spare spare AND_OR1 AND_OR2 AND_OR3 spare Q Q1 Q2 spare spare spare
Input signal 1, first group Input signal 2, first group Input signal 3, first group Input signal 4, first group Input signal 5, first group Input signal 1, second group Input signal 2, second group Input signal 3, second group Input signal 4, second group Input signal 5, second group 1 = I1_1 will be inverted 1 = I1_2 will be inverted 1 = I1_3 will be inverted 1 = I1_4 will be inverted 1 = I1_5 will be inverted 1 = I2_1 will be inverted 1 = I2_2 will be inverted 1 = I2_3 will be inverted 1 = I2_4 will be inverted 1 = I2_5 will be inverted
1= AND, 0= OR first group 1= AND, 0= OR second group 1= AND, 0= OR both groups Output signal Interim result, first group Interim result, second group
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Bit
28-7
C_INTERL
Operator control and monitoring

Display
When an interlock protective circuit is present, the corresponding interface is indicated with a blue point in the diagnostic dialog of the associated module type.
The interlock dialog displays the input parameter name of its logical state and the subsequent interconnection. In an error situation, the input signal is displayed with a red background. For the control room operator meaningful designations should be chosen for the input parameters.
Operator Control:
A single click on the corresponding interface designation opens the Interlock dialog. The interlock dialog can be closed using the Close Button. Further functions are not enabled.
28-8
C_INTER5
29 C_INTER5
29 C_INTER5
Description of C_INTER5 Type/Number Calling OBs Function Configuring Error handling Start-up characteristics Time response Assignment of the 32-bit status word VSTATUS Message characteristics Monitoring of process variables I/O-bar of C_INTER5 VSTATUS for C_INTER5 Operator control and monitoring Display Operator Control
1
2 2 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 6 7 7 7
Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 22.03.2004 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\29_Interlock5_e.doc
29-1
C_INTER5
Description of C_INTER5
Type/Number
Module name: Module no.: C_INTER5 FB1076
Calling OBs
In the same OB with and after the last block whose signals are to be displayed on the C_INTER5.
Function
The C_INTER5 block is used to implement a standardized interlock display which can be called on the OS. The block can be assigned a maximum of 5 input signals, which can each be inverted as required. The main object of the C_INTER5 block was developed in order to save much as possible OS variables. Therefore the signal designations are not entered at the input signals, but in the string variable S_TEXT. The designations of all 5 input signals must be entered in this string variable S_TEXT, separated by a semicolon ;. The string length for each signal designation is 16 characters. Operating principle The five inputs I1_1 to I1_5 form a group. Each signal can be linked logically either directly or inverted by setting the corresponding inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5. The type of logic operation of the group is set at the AND_OR1 parameter. The logic result LOG1 is represented by green color.
29-2
C_INTER5
Configuring
AS: CFC Plan editing example: The assignment of instance names is particularly important when the Interlock module is used. Depending on the "main object", the name is formed as follows. For example, C_DRV_1D motor with plant identifier "FK11/E001" should be given an interlock protective circuit on the input interface "ESVG". The name of the interlock module instances consists of: FK11/E001 _ESVG 1-3 = main object = interface description = number of the interlock modules, max . 3 units
i.e. FK11/E001_ESVG1 is the name of the first interlock module.
Please note: - Correctly select the interconnection logic (red background means error) - Assign the signal designations for the control room operator with understandable text. - Enter the signal designations in S_TEXT.
OS: No further parameterisation is necessary. However, an OS compile must be carried out (in order to generate the tags in the tag management).
29-3
C_INTER5
Error handling
Only by means of the operating system.
Start-up characteristics
No special measures taken.
Time response
The block does not have a time response.
Assignment of the 32-bit status word VSTATUS

see VSTATUS for C_INTER5
Does not exist.

Does not exist.
29-4
C_INTER5
I/O-bar of C_INTER5
C_INTER5
Permitted Values
Element AND_OR1 I1_1 I1_2 I1_3 I1_4 I1_5 NEG1_1 NEG1_2 NEG1_3 NEG1_4 NEG1_5
Meaning 1= AND, 0= OR first group Input signal 1, first group Input signal 2, first group Input signal 3, first group Input signal 4, first group Input signal 5, first group 1 = I1_1 will be inverted 1 = I1_2 will be inverted 1 = I1_3 will be inverted 1 = I1_4 will be inverted 1 = I1_5 will be inverted
Format BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
Default 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Type Attr. I I I I I I I I I I I Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
HMI
+ + + + +
S_TEXT
aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa; bbbbbbbb bbbbbbbb; Signal designations for the STRING ccccccccc input signals 1 to 5, separated [86] ccccccc; by a semicolon. dddddddd dddddddd; eeeeeeee eeeeeeee Output signal Quality Code for Q Quality Code for output Q Extended status display in block icons BOOL BYTE BYTE 0 16#80 16#80
Q QC_Q QC_Q_I VSTATUS
O O I O +
DWORD DW#16#0
29-5
C_INTER5
VSTATUS for C_INTER5
Comment
Variable Name
I1_1 I1_2 I1_3 I1_4 I1_5 spare spare spare spare spare NEG1_1 NEG1_2 NEG1_3 NEG1_4 NEG1_5 spare spare spare spare spare spare spare AND_OR1 spare spare spare Q spare spare spare spare spare
Input signal 1, first group Input signal 2, first group Input signal 3, first group Input signal 4, first group Input signal 5, first group
1 = I1_1 will be inverted 1 = I1_2 will be inverted 1 = I1_3 will be inverted 1 = I1_4 will be inverted 1 = I1_5 will be inverted
1= AND, 0= OR first group
Output signal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
29-6
Bit
C_INTER5
Operator control and monitoring

Display
When an interlock protective circuit is present, the corresponding interface is indicated with a blue point in the diagnostic dialog of the associated module type.
The interlock dialog displays the input parameter name of its logical state and the subsequent interconnection. In an error situation, the input signal is displayed with a red background. For the control room operator meaningful designations should be chosen for the input parameters.
Operator Control
A single click on the corresponding interface designation opens the Interlock dialog. Further functions are not enabled.
29-7

Objects

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Objects

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 01.03.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\01_Introduction_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Reference Manuals System Objects Glossary

Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Reference Manual Objects

Reference - System 1 2 3 4 5 6 System Description Introduction

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved.

Reference Manual Objects

Reference - Glossary 1 2 Introduction Definitions and Instructions

Copyright Siemens AG. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 26.02.2003 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 26.02.2003 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

FB1001 FB1002 FB1003 FB1004 FB1005

C_DRV_1D C_DAMPER C_DRV_2D C_ANNUNC C_ANNUN8

Additional block for group/route

382 122 122

nein nein nein

FC509 to FC530 and FC1061, FC1062 ** not relevant

Reference Manual Objects

Explanations to the Table Module Data:

Instance DB length Memory requirements of an instance DB

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Cycle-time measurements for sample configuration:

Communication resources (PBK) for

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Introduction to the Module Description (AS)

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

I/O bar of ...

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 06.12.1999 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\02_Allgemein_E.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Basic state 1-signal

Basic state 1-Signal

Basic state 1-Signal

Basic state 1-Signal

Basic state 0-Signal

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Basic state 1-Signal

Protection interlock (always effective)

Basic state 1-Signal

Copyright Siemens AG. All Rights Reserved. Edition: 03.01.2005 D:\CEM_V6\DOCU\English\Reference\Objects\03_E_e.doc

Reference Manual Objects

Protection interlock (only in automatic mode) Basic state 1-signal

Basic state 1-signal